Zyxel NAS520-4T User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for NAS520-4T by Zyxel which is a product in the NAS & Storage Servers category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Zyxel P-871M Manual

Zyxel GS-105B Manual

Zyxel 793H Manual

Zyxel USG-20 Manual

Zyxel ES1100-8P Manual

Zyxel XGS4700-48F Manual

Zyxel NWA3550-N Manual

Quick Start Guide

www.zyxel.com

Cloud Storage

NAS Series

Version 5.1

Edition 2

User’s Guide

Default Login Details

Web Address nas326

nas542

nas540

nas520

User Name admin

Password 1234

Related Documentation and Online Support

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Related Documentation and Online Support

IMPORTANT!

READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE.

KEEP THIS GUIDE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.

Screenshots and graphics in this book may differ slightly from your product due to differences in

your product firmware or your computer operating system. Every effort has been made to ensure

that the information in this manual is accurate.

more on the web desktop.

Figure 4 NAS Login Scre en

2.3 NAS Starter Utility

• The NAS Starter Utility broadcasts a request packet when you first run it. Each NAS has an NAS

Starter Utility Agent that always listens and responds to requests from the NAS Starter Utility.

The NAS Starter Utility receives the response packet that contains information, such as host

name, IP, and so on.

• If you plan to use more than one NAS in your network, configure them with unique server

names. This enables you to identify each NAS in the NAS Starter Utility screens.

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

2.3.1 NAS Seeker Screen

Use this screen to view the NASs in your network. The NAS’s Server Name. The default is ‘NAS’

followed by the number of your model (‘NAS540’ for example). See Section 2.3.5 on page 23 for

how to change it to a more recognizable one in your network.

Click the NAS Starter Utility icon on your desktop or in the Windows system tray to start the NAS

Starter Utility. Alternatively you can click Start > Programs > ZyXEL > NAS Starter Utility.

Figure 5 NAS Starter Utility Desktop Icon

Figure 6 NAS Starter Utility Windows System Tray Icon

The first time you open the NAS Starter Utility the discovery screen appears as follows.

Figure 7 NAS Seeker

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 2 NAS Seeker

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Connect Select a NAS and click this to connect to it.

Refresh Click this to refresh the screen. The NAS Starter Utility does not automatically refresh.

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

2.3.2 Main NAS Starter Utility Screen

The main NAS Starter Utility screen displays after you select an NAS in the NAS Seeker screen.

Figure 8 NAS Starter Utility Main Screen

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Status This shows whether the NAS is Online, Unreachable, Configuring, or Config Failed.

Server Name This is the server name you configured for the NAS. If you have more than one NAS in

your network, it is recommended that you give each one a unique name for identification

purposes.

IP Address This is the current IP address of the NAS.

Table 2 NAS Seeker (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 3 NAS Starter Utility Main Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION

? Click this to display t h e utility help.

Configuration Click this to configure system settings (see Section 2.3.5 on page 23).

NAS Seeker Click this to use the NAS Seeker s creen (Section 2.3.1 on page 20 ) to find and connect to

a different NAS on your network.

Server Name This is the server name you configured for the NAS. If you have more than one NAS in

your network, it is recommended that you give each one a unique name for identification

purposes.

IP Address This is the current IP address of the NAS.

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

2.3.3 Directory of the NAS

In the main NAS Starter Utility screen click Shared Folder to log into the NAS’s file directory in

Windows Explorer. Enter the administrator user name and password and click Login.

Figure 9 Login

The utility opens the NAS’s directory in Windows Explorer.

Figure 10 Directory

MAC Address This is the NAS’s unique physical hardware address (MAC).

Firmware Version This shows the version of firmware the NAS is currently using.

Status This shows whether the NAS is Online, Uninitialized, Unreachable, Configuring, or

Config Fail ed.

Run Initialization

Wizard This button displays if the NAS detects that the NAS has not yet configured any of the

installed hard disks. Click this button to go to the Web Configurator login screen (see

Section 7.2 on page 38).

Capacity This shows the NAS’s total, in-use, and remaini ng storage capacity.

DeskTop Click this but ton to go to the W eb Configurator lo gin screen (see Section 7.2 on page 38).

Network Drive Click this to add the NAS as a network drive in your computer’s Windows Explorer.

Shared Folder Click this to log into the NAS’s file directory in Windows Explorer.

myZ yXELcloud Click this to go to myc loud.zyxel .com to set up a free DDNS host name for the NAS so you

can connect to it eas ily from the Internet.

Table 3 NAS Starter Utility Main Screen (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

2.3.4 Network Drive

In the main NAS Starter Utility screen click Network Drive to add the NAS as a network drive in

your computer’s Windows Explorer.

Enter your user name and password and click Login to be able to add the NAS’s shares to which

you have access as network drives. Otherwise select Guest and click Login to be able to add the

NAS’s public shares as network drives.

Figure 11 Login

Select a share on the NAS and the drive letter on your computer to which you want to map it. The

shares that each user can select to map depends on the user’s permissions. For example, if share1

is private to user1, then only user1 is allowed to map share1. The table displays the NAS shares

that are already mapped to drive letters on your computer. After you click Apply you can see the

new drive in Windows Explorer (My Computer) where you can access and use it like your

computer’s other drives.

Figure 12 Network Drive

2.3.5 Configure System Settings

Use these screens to be able to change the NAS’s server name, time zone, PPPoE, IP address,

subnet mask, default gateway, or DNS settings.

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Click Configuration > System Setting in the main utility screen to display the following screen.

Figure 13 NAS Starter Utility > Configuration > System Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 4 NAS Starter Utility > Configuration > System Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Server Name Specify a name to uniquely identify the NAS on your network. Yo u can enter up to 15

alphanumeric characters with minus signs allowed but not as the last character. The

name must begin with an alphabetic character (a-z) and is case sensi tive.

Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your

time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Enable PPPoE

Connection Click this if your Internet connection requires you to enter a user name and password to

connect to the Inte rnet. Enter your user name and pass wo rd

IP Address Use these fie lds to configure the IP address of the LAN interface through which you are

connected to the NAS.

When the LAN interfaces are set to stand-alone, this configures the IP address of the LAN

interface in the same subnet as your computer. It configures LAN1 if both LAN interfaces

are in the same subn et as your computer.

If you use the administrator configuration screens to set the LAN interfaces to link

aggregation, this configures the IP address that both LAN interfaces share.

Automatically get

IP address Select this if the NAS is automatically assigned an IP address from the ISP or a DHCP

server in your network.

Manually assign IP

address Select this if you want to assign the NAS a fixed IP address, subnet mask and default

gateway.

Note: Do not configure an IP address that is already in use in your network. This results to

a network IP address conflict and makes the NAS inaccessible.

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Use from DHCP

server Domain Name System (DNS) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP

address and vice versa. Select this if the NAS is automatically given DNS information

from the ISP or a DHCP server in your network.

DNS Domain Name System (DNS) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP

address and vice versa.

Select Use from DHCP server if the NAS is automatically given DNS information from

the ISP or a DHCP server in your network.

Select Manually assign DNS server if you were given specific IP address(es) of the

DNS server(s). Enter the primary and secondary DNS in the corresponding fields.

Table 4 NAS Starter Utility > Configuration > System Setting (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

CHAPTER 3

Accessing Your Cloud Remotely

Use the NAS to set up your own secure personal cloud. Keep your videos, photos, music, and files

safely at home and under your control. Access, share, and stream files from anywhere using your

PC, Mac computer, and mobile devices.

3.1 myZyXELCloud Service

Use the myZyXELCloud service at https://mycloud.zyxel.com to set up a free hostname like

name.zyxel.me and set the NAS to use it. This lets you easily access the NAS through the Internet.

The myZyXELcloud Web portal also lets you monitor the NAS’s health from anywhere.

3.2 ZyXEL Drive

Use the ZyXEL Drive app to stream or download photos, videos, and music to your Android or iOS

phone through the Internet. You can also upload files from your phone to the NAS.

After setting up the myZ yXELCloud service, go to http://zyx el.to/zdrive to get the Z yXEL Driv e app

for your Android or iOS phone.

3.2.1 ZyXEL Drive Welcome

Community Sharing - Send invitation links to friends and family to conveniently share selected

NAS folders.

DirectConnect - Privately and securely access your NAS content from anywhere.

Chapter 3 Accessing Your Cloud Remotely

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 14 ZyXEL Drive Welcome

3.2.2 NAS and File List

My own NAS - Access and share files from your own NAS.

Shared With Me - Access files on someone else’s NAS folder that they have shared with you.

Chapter 3 Accessing Your Cloud Remotely

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 15 NAS and File List

3.2.3 Uploading and Media Streaming

Use ZyXEL Drive to upload photos and videos from your mobile device to the NAS. You can also

stream videos and music stored on the NAS.

Chapter 3 Accessing Your Cloud Remotely

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 16 Uploading and Media Streaming

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

CHAPTER 4

zCloud

ZyXEL zCloud app lets you play your favorite multimedia files on the NAS on your big screen TV.

Use TV streaming devices such as Apple TV, Google Chromecast, Roku 3, and Amazon Fire TV; or

play files directly on smart TVs like those from Samsung and LG.

• Browse your media contents from your NAS directly on your Android or iOS device.

• View photos stored on your NAS with the app's built-in slideshow.

• Play music stored on your NAS.

• Watch videos stored on your NAS .

• Upload files from your Android device to your NAS.

• Upload photos and videos from your iOS device to your NAS.

• Browse and manage files stored on the NAS.

• Compatibility: Requires Android 4.0.3 or later or iOS 7 or 8.

4.1 Using zCloud

Install the zCloud app from Google Play or the Apple App store. Then tap the zCloud icon to open it.

Figure 17 zCloud Icon

The main menu displays.

Chapter 4 zCloud

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 18 zCloud Android and iOS Main Menus

Find a NAS - use your NAS’s IP address and your user name and password to connect to it.

NAS540 - access the NAS’ s default photo, music, and video shares. Y ou can pla y, download, upload

and manage files.

Download - access and manage files downloaded from the NAS to your Android or iOS device and

manage download tasks.

Upload - view and manage upload tasks.

4.2 zCloud TV Streaming

Here is an example of the zCloud app letting you choose a player to use to stream a video on your

TV.

Chapter 4 zCloud

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 19 zCloud Android and iOS TV Streaming

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

CHAPTER 5

Managing Users, Groups, and Shares

5.1 Managing Users, Groups, and Shares

•Use the Users screens (Chapter 22 on page 281) to create and manage administrator and user

accounts.

•Use the Groups screens (Chapter 23 on page 287) to create and manage groups of user

accounts. You can assign users to groups and grant individual groups access rights to specific

shares.

•Use the Shares screens (Chapter 24 on page 291) to manage access permissions mapped to

specific folders on a volume. A share is equivalent to the Windows concept of a shared folder.

Map a share to a network drive for easy and familiar file transfer for Windows users.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

CHAPTER 6

Backing Up, Retrieving, and Syncing Files

6.1 About Backups

Backup before you need it. The NAS’s multiple backup methods make it easy to follow the 3-2-1

backup rule:

• At least 3 copies of data

• Stored on at least 2 different media

• With at least 1 copy off-site.

6.2 Managing a USB Device and USB Backups

Use the USB ports and SD card slot to copy or synchronize files between a connected USB or SD

device and the NAS. You can use the USB drive or SD card for off-site backups.

•Use the Copy/Sync button on the front panel to copy or synchronize files between a connected

USB or SD storage device and the NAS. See S ection 17.10 on page 232 to configure the copy/

sync settings.

•Use the NAS’s Backup screens (Section 27.3 on page 321) to schedule backups of files and

folders on your NAS to a USB device or SD card. See Section 14.14.2 on page 194 for an

example.

6.3 Remote Backups

Use the NAS’s Backup screens (Section 27.3 on page 321) to schedule backups of files and folders

on your NAS to another ZyXEL NAS or a NAS using rsync.

•See Section 14.14.1 on page 192 for an example of backing up to a remote NAS.

•Use the Restore screens (Section 27.4 on page 332) to restore previous backups based on the

backup job. See Section 14.14.3 on page 196 for an example.

• If you deleted an archive backup job or the NAS or the RAID array containing the backup job

failed, you can restore by backup files. See Section 14.14.3 on page 196 for an example.

6.4 Internal Backups

Use the NAS’s Backup screens (Section 27.3 on page 321) to schedule backups of files and folders

on your NAS to another folder on the NAS.

Chapter 6 Backing Up, Retrieving, and Syncing Files

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

•See Section 14.14.2 on page 194 for an example of how to back up the NAS to another NAS.

•Use the Restore screens (Section 27.4 on page 332) to restore previous backups based on the

backup job. See Section 14.14.3 on page 196 for an example.

6.5 Cloud Backups

Use the NAS with cloud services for off-site backups and synchronization.

•Use Dropbox (Chapter 20 on page 274) to log the NAS into your Dropbox account to easily

move files to your NAS and have the NAS download *.torrent files.

•Use Memopal (Section 18.7 on page 254) to back up files on the NAS to your Memopal online

backup and storage account.

6.6 Synchronizing Files

Besides backups, the NAS also provides pure synchronization solutions.

Note: Synchronization is not backup. When you delete a file in one location,

synchronization deletes it in the other location. Do not store your only copy of a

document in a synchronized folder.

•Use the GoogleDriveClient package (Section 18.8 on page 256) to two-way synchronize local

NAS folders and Google Drive accounts. Changes in the Google Drive account appear in the local

sync folder and changes in the local sync folder appear in the Google Drive account.

•Use the ownCloud package (Section 18.6 on page 251) to host your own private cloud on the

NAS. The ownCloud package lets the NAS work as an ownCloud server so computers and mobile

devices using the ownCloud client can access, sync, and share files across devices.

PART I

Web Desktop at a

Glance

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

CHAPTER 7

Web Configurator

7.1 Overview

This chapter describes how to access the NAS web configurator and provides an overview of its

screens. The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy NAS setup

and manag e ment using an I nternet bro wser.

Use Internet Explorer 11.0.9, Mozilla Firefox 31.0, Safari 5.1.7, Google Chrome 37.0.2, or later

versions of these browsers. The recommended screen resolution is 1440 by 900 pixels or higher.

In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:

• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in

Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.

• JavaScript (enabled by default).

7.2 Accessing the NAS Web Configurator

1Make sure your NAS is properly connected and that your computer is in the same subnet as the

NAS (refer to the Quick Start Guide or the appendices).

2Open your browser and type in the server name of the NAS. The default is “nas” followed by the

number of your model (“nas540” for example). Configure the server name of your NAS using the

Network Configuration screen (Section 2.3.5 on page 23) of the NAS Starter Utility.

Figure 20 NAS URL

3The default username and password are “admin” and “1234” respectively. Enter your username and

password. See Chapter 22 on page 281 for how to create other user accounts. If you use the option

to stay logged in (assuming you do not log out), make sure you keep your computer secure from

unauthorized access. Click the arrow to log in. Logging in with a (non-administrator) user account

takes you to a different Desktop screen (see Section 7.3 on page 41 for details).

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 21 NAS Login Screen

Make sure you have a backup of any existing dat a in the hard disk before

installing it in the NAS. Creating a volume formats the hard disk and

deletes all data in the process.

4This screen displays if you hav e not created a volume yet. Click Create Volume to make a volume

or click the x to close the screen to go to the Desktop (Section 7.3 on page 41).

Figure 22 Welcome Screen

5Select Create single volume on RAID for a simple set up. Go to Section 8.3.1 on page 55 for

details.

Select Create Multiple volumes on disk group to be able to create more than one storage

volume. Go to Section 8.3.3 on page 64 for details.

Figure 23 Create Volume

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

If you choose Existing on disk group, you will go to the screens below after clicking Next.

Figure 24 Existing on Disk Group

If this is the first time the NAS has created a volume, it needs to reboot after the volume is created.

Click Yes to reboot or No to go to the Desktop.

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 25 Reboot

7.3 Desktop

The Desktop screen displays after you log in. Hover your mouse over the heading bar icons to

display their names.

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 26 Desktop (Administrator)

Figure 27 Desktop (User)

Note: The Web Configurator session automatically times out if left idle for 15 minutes.

Simply log back into the NAS if this happens to you.

1Desktop - click this to minimize all windows so you can see the desktop. Click it again to restore

the windows to their previous state.

Status Zone

1234567

8 9 10 11

1213

14 15

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

2Storage Manager- click this to open the storage configuration screens.

3Control Panel - click this to open the control panel screens to configure the network setting and

upgrade firmware.

4Status Center - click this to display NAS status information.

5Help - click this to display the NAS’ embedded help system screens.

6Administrator - click this to open the administrator configuration screens in a new tab.

7File Browser - click this to see files in a tree-folder structure.

8Photo - click this to view photos in the shares that publish photos.

9Music - click this to view and play music files in the shares that publish music.

10 Video - click this to view and play video files in the shares that publish videos.

11 myZyXELcloud - click this to go to mycloud.zyxel.com to set up a free DDNS hostname for the

NAS so you can connect to it easily from the Internet.

12 User - click this to display the Logout link.

13 Eject NAS External Drives - click this to eject the connected external volumes.

14 Playzone Settings - click this to open the playzone configuration s creen in a n ew tab.

15 Application Zone - click this to open the application zone in a new tab.

7.3.1 Status Zone

The Status Zone displays icons for various features you can access.

Table 5 Status Zone Icons

ICON DESCRIPTION

Click System Status to open the Status Center screen. System Status displays the health

state of the NAS. A green circle with a check mark indicates healthy.

Web Sessions displays the current number of web sessions. Click this to go to the Network

screen for more details.

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

7.3.2 Grouping Icons

You can drag one icon to another one and make them a group as shown below.

Click this to select widgets to show on the status bar.

Select or clear the widgets to show or hide on the Status bar. Click OK to save your changes or

Cancel to exit this screen without saving changes.

Click this to hide or show the status bar.

Table 5 Status Zone Icons (continued)

ICON DESCRIPTION

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 28 Grouping Icons

After the group is created, the default group name is NewGroup. You can click the icon to change

the group name. In the following example, the group name is changed to Media.

Figure 29 Change the Group Name

You can also move the group to another page by right-clicking the icon as shown next.

Chapter 7 Web Configurator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 30 Move the Group Location

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

CHAPTER 8

Storage Manager

8.1 Overview

This chapter displays the status of both internal and extern al storage, and introduces how to

configure disk groups, volumes, and iSCSI functions. Click Storage Manager on the Desktop to

go to the following screens in a new window.

8.2 Storage Manager Overview

Click Storage Manager on the Desktop to display the status of both internal and external

storage, and configure disk groups, volumes, and iSCSI functions.

The Storage Manager Overview screen displays the status, current storage configuration and

volume usage of internal volumes and capacity usage of external volumes.

Figure 31 Storage Manager > Overview > Internal Volumes

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 32 Storage Manager > Overview > External Volumes

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 6 Storage Manager > Overview

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Storage The circular icon displays the overall health state of the NAS.

A green circle with a check mark indicates healthy.

An orange circle with an exclamation mark indicates attention. This appears when

a volume or disk group is degraded. Click Repair to repair it.

An red circle with an exclamation mark indicates danger. This appears when a

volume or disk group is crashed. You cannot recover the volume.

Volume Usage This shows how much of each volume is currently used.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3 Internal Storage

A volume is a basic storage space on the NAS. To store data on the NAS, you must create at least

one volume. Your NAS supports the following:

• Internal volumes (built on the hard disks installed in the NAS)

• External volumes (built on the external storage devices attached to the NAS)

Volume (for Internal

Volumes) This section shows the current storage usage for each volume built directly on top

of a RAID. These volumes have higher access performance than volumes on a disk

group but are less flexible in regards to size.

Details include the currently u sed percentage of the volume.

Shared Folder (Normal) - green on the circle represents the volume’s

percentage of used capacity in a healthy state.

LUN (Normal) - blue on the circle represe nts the iSCSI LUN’s percentage of used

capacity.

Degraded - orange on the circle represents the volume’s percentage of used

capacity in a degraded state. Degraded means one or more disks has failed but

you can still replace a faulty disk to recover the volume.

Crashed/Full - a red exclamation point represents the volume is in a down state.

Down means you cannot recover the volume. Full means th e volume has run out

of space.

Available - gray on the circle represents the volume’s percentage of unused

capacity.

This section also displays the volume’s used capacity, and total capacity available.

Volume (for External

Volumes) Details include the cu rrently used percentage of the volume.

Used - gre en on the circle represen ts the volume’ s percentage of used capacity in

a healthy state.

Full - a red exclamation point represents the volume has run out of space.

Unformatted - purple on the circle represents the connected USB storage device

is not formatted with a file system.

Unsupported - violet on the circle represents the connected USB storage device

uses a file system the NAS does not support.

Available - gray on the circle represents the volume’s percentage of unused

capacity.

This section also displays the volume’s used capacity, and total capacity available.

Volume on Disk Group This section shows the current storage usa ge for each volume built on top of a

disk group. You can expand a volume’s size after creation if the disk group has

unallocated space. You can also expand a disk group by adding hard disks.

Table 6 Storage Manager > Overview (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Internal Volumes

RAID Types

The following table describes RAID types.

Note: RAID 5, R A ID 6 , R A ID 1 0, and the hot spa r e op ti on ap p ly to 4-bay NAS devic es .

Repair Volumes or Disk Groups

If a hard disk in a RAID 1 with a hot spare or a RAID 5 with a hot spare fails, the NAS automatically

uses the hot spare to re-build the volume or disk group. Later you can replace the failed hard disk

and add the new disk as a hot spare.

A hard disk failure in a RAID 1, RAID 5, RAID 6, or RAID 10 degrades the volume or disk group.

Replace the failed disk and use the Internal Storage screen’s Repair link to repair the volume.

Table 7 Internal Volumes

OPTION DESCRIPTION

Volume Allocates all the available space to the volume.

Provides better performance.

Volume on Di sk

Group Allows you to create multiple volumes on a disk group.

Allows you to customize the size of a volume.

Table 8 RAID Types

RAID

TYPE NO. OF

HDD

NO. OF HDD

ALLOWED TO

FAIL DESCRIPTION CAPACITY

Basic 1 0 Use Basic with one disk. It has no fault

tolerance. 1 x (HDD size)

JBOD 2-4 0 Use JBOD with two or more disks for

maximum capacity. This is just a collection of

disks with no fault tolera nce.

sum of HDD sizes

RAID 0 2-4 0 Use RAID 0 with two or four disks for

maximum speed and no fault tolerance. sum of HDD sizes

RAID 1 2-4 (No. of HDD) -1 Use RAID 1 to create an exact copy of data

on one disk to a second disk. Use thi s wi th

two to four disks to mirror primary data to

another disk(s) with high performance.

You can add a hot spare to a 2-disk RAID 1.

Smallest HDD size

RAID 5 3-4 1 Use RAID 5 with three or four disks to

balance performance and hard disk capacity

usage with data protection in case of disk

failure.

You can add a hot spare to a 3-disk RAID 5.

(No. of HDD – 1) x

(smallest HDD

size)

RAID 6 4 2 Use RAID 6 with four disks for more data

protection in case of disk failure. (No. of HDD – 2) x

(smallest HDD

size)

RAID 10 4 1 HDD in each

RAID 1 group Use RAID 10 with four disks to get better

performance than RAID 6, with slightly less

data protection.

(No. of HDD / 2) x

(smallest HDD

size)

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Change RAID Type

Y ou can change the following RAID t ypes without losing stored data. This can help you manage your

storage capacity as you add more disks.

Expand Volumes or Disk Groups

As your content grows, y ou can do the fo llowing to expand the stor age capacity of a v olume or disk

group without losing stored data.

Use the Volume screen to configure and manage internal volumes. From the Internal Storage

screen, click Volume to open the screen as shown.

Table 9 Internal Volumes

RAID TYPE WHAT YOU CAN CHANGE IT TO

Basic RAID 1

RAID 1 RAID 1 with a hot spare or RAID 5

RAID 5 RAID 5 with a hot spare or RAID 6

Ta ble 10 Expand Volumes and Disk Groups

EXPANSION

METHOD DESCRIPTION

Using

unallocated disk

space

You can add more storage space to a volume if there is still some spac e unalloca ted on the

same disk group.

Adding disks You can add one or more disks to a JBOD, RAID 1 or RAID 5.

The hard disk you want to add must have capacity equal to or greater than the smallest

disk in the volume or disk group.

Replacing with

larger disks You can replace smaller disks in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 6 with larger disks.

Replace disks one-by-one.

Replace the smallest disk in the volume or disk group first.

After replacing a disk, you must use the Internal Storage screen’s Manage link to re pair

the volume.

Wait for the repair process to complete before you replace another disk.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 33 Internal Storage Volume

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 11 Internal Storage > Volume

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Volume

Use this section to configure and manage volumes built on hard disks directly.

Create Click this to format internal hard disks and create a new vo lume. All data on the disk(s)

will be lost.

Note: This button is not available while the NAS is creating, deleting, or changing the

RAID type of any volume or disk group.

A pop-up screen appears if all installed hard disks are used by other volumes or disk

groups. Y ou will need to install another hard disk into the NAS if any disk tray is available

or remov e unnecessary volu mes or disk groups to rel ease the stor age space. Click OK to

close this screen.

No Disk in NAS

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Manage Select a volume and click Manage to edit, repair or expand the volume.

Note: This button is available only when you can repair, expand or change RAID type.

Delete Select a volume and click Delete to remove it.

Note: If you delete a volume, all data in the volume disks is erased.

Add Hot Spare Select a RAID 1 or RAID 5 volume and click Add Hot Spare to add another disk as a

hot-spare (standby) to the RAID array. A pop-up screen displays.

Figure 34 Add Hot Spare

Select a disk from the drop-down list box and then click Apply.

See Table 8 on page 50 for more information about RAID.

Note: The capacity of the disk you are adding must be equal to or greater than the largest

disk in the RAID 1 or RAID 5 array.

Remov e Hot Spare Select a RAID 1 or RAID 5 v olume and click Remove Hot Spare to remove the standby

drive from the RAID array.

Status This field shows whether the volume is normal, degraded, cr ashed, Creating, Deleting,

Expanding, Repairing or Changing the RAID type.

Normal: A green circle represents a healthy volume.

Degraded: An orange circle represents a degraded RAID 1 volume.

Crashed: A red circle represents a down volume.

The following status also displays the percentage of an action has been completed.

Creating: The NAS’s percentage progress in creating the volume.

Deleting: The NAS’s percentage progress in deleting the volume.

Expanding: The NAS’s percentage progress in expanding the volume. For a RAID 1

volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and

the evaluated remaining time.

Repairing: The NAS’s percentage progress in repairing the volume. For a RAID 1

volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and

the evaluated remaining time.

Changing: The NAS’s percentage progress in changing the volume’s RAID type. For a

RAID 1 volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has

finished and the evaluated remaining time.

Volume Name This field shows the name of the volum e. Click the column’s heading cell to display an

arrow. Use the arrow to sort the table entries in ascending or descending order.

RAID Type This field shows what type of disk storage technology (Basic, a RAID level or JBOD) a

vol ume uses.

Table 11 Internal Storage > Volume (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Usage This field shows the percentage of the volume being used, the percentage that is

available, and the total disk size.

Hot Spare This field shows the name of the standby disk if there is any for a RAID 1 or RAID 5

volume. Otherwise, it shows not supported.

Volume on Disk Group

Use this section to configure and manage volumes built on disk groups.

Create Click this to format internal hard disks and create a new volume on a disk group. All data

on the disks will be lost.

Note: This button is unavailable when a volume or disk group is being created, deleted or

changing the RAID type.

Edit Select a volume and click Edit to expand th e volume’s capacity.

Delete Select a volume and click Delete to remove it.

Note: If you delete a volume, all data in the volume disks is erased.

Note: Deleting a volume on a disk group here does not delete the corresponding disk

group. To delete a disk group, click Internal Storage > Disk Group.

Disk Group X This field shows the name of the disk group, the percentage of the disk group size that is

available, the disk group size being used, and the total disk group size.

Status This field shows whether the volume is normal, degraded, cr ashed, Creating, Deleting,

Expanding, Repairing or Changing the RAID type.

Normal: A green circle represents a healthy volume.

Degraded: An orange circle represents a degraded RAID 1 volume.

Crashed: A red circle represents a down volume.

The following status also displays the percentage of an action has been completed.

Creating: The NAS’s percentage progress in creating the volume.

Deleting: The NAS’s percentage progress in deleting the volume.

Expanding: The NAS’s percentage progress in expanding the volume. For a RAID 1

volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and

the evaluated remaining time.

Repairing: The NAS’s percentage progress in repairing the volume. For a RAID 1

volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and

the evaluated remaining time.

Changing: The NAS’s percentage progress in changing the volume’s RAID type. For a

RAID 1 volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has

finished and the evaluated remaining time.

Volume Name This field shows the name of the volum e. Click the column’s heading cell to display an

arrow. Use the arrow to sort the table entries in ascending or descending order.

File System This field shows what file system the volume uses. At the time of writing, your NAS uses

the EXT4 file system for internal volumes.

Usage This field shows the percentage of the volume being used, the percentage that is

available, and the total disk group size.

Table 11 Internal Storage > Volume (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.1 Creating a Volume

Use the Create Volume screen to configure a volume directly on a disk/RAID, which has better

performance. Click Create in the Volume section of the Internal Storage > Volume screen to

open the screen as shown.

Note: Create a volume on a disk group instead if y ou wa nt to ha ve mul tiple volumes on a

disk. See Section 8.3.3 on page 64 for more information. Moreover, the maximum

size for one volume is 16TB.

Figure 35 Create Volume

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 12 Create Volume

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 1. Select Disks and RAID Type

Select disks This section lists all a v ailabl e hard disks in the table and displays the disk tr ays where they

are currently installed on the graphic at the right.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.2 Managing a Volume

Use the Manage Volume screen to repair, expand a volume or change the volume’s RAID type. In

the Internal Storage > Volume screen, select a volume and then click Manage in the Volume

section to open the screen as shown.

The available options vary depending on the conditions it matches. For example, the Repair RAID

option is available only when a degraded volume is selected.

Select one or more hard disks wh ere you want to create a volume. Use the c heck box on

the top to select or unselect all entries in this column.

Disk Name This field shows the name of the hard disk.

Size This field shows the total disk size.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hard disk.

Choose a RAID

type Select a RAID type from the drop-down list box. The corresponding space allocations of

available size, data protection area, and wasted size display.

Use Basic with one disk.

Use JBOD with two or more disks for maximum capacity.

Use RAID 0 with two or four disks for maximum speed.

Use RAID 1 with two or more disks to mirror primary data to another disk(s) with high

performance.

Use RAID 5 with three or more disks to balance performance, hard disk capacity usage

with data protecti on in case of disk failure.

Use RAID 6 with four disks for more data protection in case of disk failure.

Use RAID 10 with four disks to get better performance than RAID 6, with slightly less data

protection.

See Table 8 on page 50 or Section 8.6 on page 98 for more information.

Note: Use the same capacity of hard disks for RAID 1, 5, 6, or 10 to avoid wasting space.

Back This button is not available at this step.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Step 2. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Disk Selected This field displays the hard disks you have selected.

RAID Type This field displays the type of RAID on which t h e volume will be built.

Vo lume Type This field displays the type of the volume, Single volume on RAID (no disk group).

Volume Name This field displays the name of the volume.

Volume

Capacity This field displays the size of the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Ta ble 12 Create Volume (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 36 Manage Volume (Repair RAID)

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 37 Manage V olume (Expand the volume by adding disk(s) )

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 38 Manage Volume (Change RAID Type)

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 39 Manage Volume (Change RAID Type)

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 13 Manage Volume

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Repair RAID Select this to repair a degraded RAID volume.

Expand the

volume by

adding disk(s)

Select this to add one or more disks to a JBOD, RAID 1 or RAID 5 volume. You can add a

disk to increase an array’s capacity or to use as a hot-spare (standby). When you add a

disk to an existing array, you do not have to re-create shares, access rights and so on as

you would if you create a new volume.

Note: This option is available when a disk has not been allocated to any volume or disk group

yet.

Expand the

volume with

unallocated disk

space

Select this to add more storage space to a volume if there is still some space unallocated on

the same disk group. Select this if the NAS fails to expand a volume by adding disk(s) and

the final volume capacity is not as expec ted. F or example, you want to expand a 1 TB RAID

1 volume by adding two more 1 TB disks. The v o l ume size should be 2 TB afte r e xpans i o n,

however, you just see 1 TB. Use this option to fix the issue.

Change RAID

Type Select this if you want to change the volume’s RAID type from Basic to RAID 1, RAID 1 to

RAID 5, or RAID 5 to RAID 6.

The following describes labels on the following screens after you select Repair RAID in this screen.

Step 1. Select Disks

A This shows the name of the volume you have selected.

Status This field displays the status of the vo lume.

RAID Type This field displays the type of RAID on wh ich the volume is built.

Disk Info

Status This field displays the status of the disk .

Disk Name This field displays the name of the disk.

Size This field displays the total capacity of the disk.

Model Name This field displays the model of the disk.

Select a disk to

replace the

failed one

This section l ists all available hard disks in the table and displays the corresponding disk

tray of the disks you selected on the graphic at the right.

Select one or more hard disks for increasing the volume’s capacity. Use the check box on

the top to select or unselect all entries in this column.

Disk Name This field shows the name of a hard disk.

Size This field shows the total disk size.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hard disk.

Expected

Capacity This fiel d shows the corre sponding spac e allocati ons of av ail able size, data protection area,

and wasted size according to your selections on hard disks above.

Note: Use the same capacity of hard disks for RAID 1, 5, 6, or 10 to avoid wasting space.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Step 2. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Action This field displays for what the configuration is.

Volume Name This field displays the name of the volume.

Disk Selected This field displays the hard disks you have selected.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Volume

Capacity This field displays the total available size o f the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

The following describes labels on the following screens after you select Expand the volume by adding

disk(s) in this screen.

Step 1. Select Disks

A This shows the name of the volume you have selected.

Status This field displays the status of the vo lume.

RAID Type This field displays the type of RAID on wh ich the volume is built.

Disk Info

Status This field displays the status of the disk .

Disk Name This field displays the name of the disk.

Size This field displays the total capacity of the disk.

Model Name This field displays the model of the disk.

Select disk(s) to

add This section lists a ll available hard disks i n the table and displays the corresponding disk

tray of the disks you selected on the graphic at the right.

Select one or more hard disks for increasing the volume’s capacity. Use the check box on

the top to select or unselect all entries in this column.

Disk Name This field shows the name of a hard disk.

Size This field shows the total disk size.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hard disk.

Expected

Capacity This fiel d shows the corre sponding spac e allocati ons of av ail able size, data protection area,

and wasted size according to your selections on hard disks above.

Note: Use the same capacity of hard disks for RAID 1, 5, 6, or 10 to avoid wasting space.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Step 2. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Action This field displays for what the configuration is.

Volume Name This field displays the name of the volume.

Disk Selected This field displays the hard disks you have selected.

Volume

Capacity This field displays the total available size o f the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

The following describes labels on the following screens after you select Expand the volume with

unallocated disk space in this screen.

Summary

Action This field displays for what the configuration is.

Ta ble 13 Manage Volume (conti nued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Volume Name This field displays the name of the volume.

Volume

Capacity This field displays the total available size o f the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

The following describes labels on the following screens after you select Change RAID Type in this screen.

Step 1. Select Disks and RAID Type

A This shows the name of the volume you have selected.

Status This field displays the status of the vo lume.

RAID Type This field displays the type of RAID on wh ich the volume is built.

Disk Info

Status This field displays the status of the disk .

Disk Name This field displays the name of the disk.

Size This field displays the total capacity of the disk.

Model Name This field displays the model of the disk.

Select disk(s) This section lists all available hard disks in the table and displays the corresponding disk

tray of the disks you selected on the graphic at the right.

Select one or more hard disks for changing the volume’s RAID type. Use the check box on

the top to select or unselect all entries in this column.

Disk Name This field shows the name of a hard disk.

Size This field shows the total disk size.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hard disk.

Choose a RAID

type Select a RAID type from the drop-down list box. The corresponding space allocations of

available size, data protection area, and wasted size display.

Use RAID 1 with two or four disks to mirror primary data to another disk(s) with high

performance.

Use RAID 5 with three or more disks to balance performance, hard disk capacity usage

with data protecti on in case of disk failure.

Use RAID 6 with four disks for more data protection in case of disk failure.

See Table 8 on page 50 or Section 8.6 on page 98 for more information.

Note: Use the same capacity of hard disks for RAID to avoid wasting space.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Step 2. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Action This field displays for what the configuration is.

Volume Name This field displays the name of the volume.

Disk Selected This field displays the hard disks you have selected.

RAID Type This field displays the type of RAID on which t h e volume will be built.

Ta ble 13 Manage Volume (conti nued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.3 Creating a Volume on Disk Group

Use the Create Volume on Disk Group screen to configure a volume on an existing or new disk

group. Click Create in the Volume on Disk Group section of the Internal Storage > Volume

screen to open the screen as shown.

Note: It is suggested to create a volume directly on a disk instead of on a disk group if

high performance is important to you. See Section 8.3.1 on page 55 for more

information.

Volume

Capacity This field displays the total size of the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Ta ble 13 Manage Volume (conti nued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 40 Create Volume on an Existing Disk Group

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 41 Create Volume on a New Disk Group

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 14 Create Volume on Disk Group

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Choose an Action

Create Volume on Select Existing on disk group and a disk group from the drop-down list box to

create a volume on the disk group. This option is available only when there i s an

existing disk group available.

Select New disk group to create a disk group and th en a volume on the disk

group.

The following fields describe the labels on the following screen s if you select Existing on disk group on the

Choose an Action screen.

Step 1. Create Volume

Disk group information

Name This field displays the name of the disk group.

Unallocated capacity This field displays the percentage of the available size, the size in use, and total

size of the disk group.

Create Volume

V olume Name This field displays the default name of the volume. You can also type a new name

for the volume.

Allocated Volume Size This field displays the number of Gigabytes available on the volume by default.

You can change the size to al locate to this volume. Click MAX to allocate all

available size of the disk group to the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Step 2. Summery

Vo lume Type This field displays the type of the volume, Multiple volumes on RAID (Disk

Group X) where Disk Group X is the disk group’s name.

Volume Name This field displays the name of the volume.

Volume Capacity This field displays the size of the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous screen.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

The following fields describe the labels on the following screens after you select New disk group on the

Choose an Action screen.

Step 1. Select Disks and RAID Type

Select disk s This section lists all available hard disks in the table and displays the disk trays

they are currently installed on the graphic at the right.

Select one or more hard disks where you want to create a volume. Use the check

box on the top to select or unselect all entries in this column.

Disk Name This field shows the name of the hard disk.

Size This field shows th e total disk size.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hard disk.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Choose a RAID type Select a RAID type from the drop-down list box. The corresponding space

allocations of available size, data protection area, and wasted size display.

Use Basic with one disk.

Use JBOD with two or more disks for maximum capacity.

Use RAID 0 with two or four disks for maximum speed.

Use RAID 1 with two or more disks to mirror primary data to another disk(s) with

high performance.

Use RAID 5 with three or more dis ks to balance performance, hard di sk capacit y

usage with data protection in case of disk failure.

Use RAID 6 with four disks for more data protection in case of disk failure.

Use RAID 10 with four disks to get better performance than RAID 6, with slightly

less data protection.

See Table 8 on page 50 or Section 8.6 on page 98 for more information.

Note: Use the same capacity of hard disks for RAID 1, 5, 6, or 10 to avoid wasting

space.

Back Click Back to go to the previous screen.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Step 2. Create Volume

Disk group information

Name This field displays the name of the disk group.

Unallocated capacity This field displays the percentage of the available size, the size in used, and total

size of the disk group.

Create Volume

V olume Name This field displays the default name of the volume. You can also type a new name

for the volume.

Vo lume Capacity This field displays the number of Gigabytes available on the volume by default.

You can set the size to alloc ate for this volum e. Click MAX to alloca te al l available

capacity of the disk group to the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Step 3. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Disk Selected This field displays the hard disk(s) on which the RAID array will be built.

RAID Type This field displays the type of RAID on which the volume will be built.

Vo lume Type This field displays the type of the volume, Multiple volumes on RAID (Disk

Group X) where Disk Group X is the disk group’s name.

Volume Name This field displays the name of the volume.

Volume Capacity This field displays the size of the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Ta ble 14 Create Volume on Disk Group (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.4 Editing a Volume on Disk Group

Use the Edit Volume on Disk Group screen to expand a volume’s capacit y. In the Internal

Storage > Volume screen, select a volume and then click Edit in the Volu me on Disk Group

section to open the screen as shown.

Figure 42 Edit Volume on Disk Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

8.3.5 Disk Group

Use the Disk Group screen to configure and manage disk groups. From the Internal Storage

screen, click Disk Group to open the screen as shown.

Ta ble 15 Edit Volume on Disk Group

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Unallocated

capacity on Disk

Group X

This field displays the percentage of the disk group size unallocated to other volumes, the

size in use, and total size of the disk group.

Current volume

size This field displays the total size of the volume, excluding the file system size.

New volume

size This field displays th e smallest size to which you can expand the volume (this includes the

volume’s current available size, file system size, and a minimum additional capacity for

expansion). Y ou can enter a bigger number or click MAX to allocate all the r est of the space

in the disk group to the volume.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any settings.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 43 Disk Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 16 Disk Group

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Create Click this to format internal hard disks and create a new disk group. All data on the disk(s)

will be lost.

Note: This button is not available while the NAS is creating, deleting, or changing the RAID

type of any volume or disk group.

Manage Select a volume and click Manage to edit, repair, or expand the volume.

Note: This button is available only when you can repair, expand or change RAID type.

Delete Select a disk group and click Delete to remove it.

Note: If you delete a disk group, all data in the disk group is erased.

Add Hot Spare Select a RAID 1 or RAID 5 disk group and click Add Hot Spare to add another disk as a

hot-spare (standby) to the RAID array. See Section 8.6 on page 98 for more information.

Note: The capacity of the disk you are adding must be equal to or greater than the largest

disk in the RAID 1 or RAID 5 array.

Note: You need four hard disks installed to use RAID 5 with hotspare.

Remove Hot

Spare Select a RAID 1 or RAID 5 disk group and click Remove Hot Spare to remove the standby

drive from the RAID array.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Disk Group X This field shows the name of the disk group and whether it is normal, degraded, crashed,

Creating, Deleting, Expanding, Repairing or Changing the RAID type.

Normal: A green circle represents a healthy volume.

Degraded: An orange circle represents a degraded RAID 1 volume.

Crashed: A red circle represents a down volume.

The following status also displays the percentage of an action has been completed.

Creating: The NAS’s percentage progress in creating the volume.

Deleting: The NAS’s percentage progress in deleting the volume.

Expanding: The NAS’s percentage progress in expanding the volume. For a RAID 1

volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and the

evaluated remaining t ime.

Repairing: The NAS’s percentage progress in repairing the volume. For a RAID 1 volume,

this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and the evaluated

remaining time.

Changing: The NAS’s percentage progress in changing the volume’s RAID type. For a

RAID 1 volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished

and the evaluated remaining time.

RAID Type This field shows the type of the RAID over which this disk group is running.

Unallocated This field shows the percentage of the disk group size that is available, the disk group size

being used, and the total disk group size.

Disk Info

Status This fi eld shows the status of th e disk.

Disk Name This field shows the name of the disk.

Size This field shows the total size of the disk.

Model Name This field shows the model of the disk.

Hot Spare

Ta ble 16 Disk Group (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.5.1 Creating a Disk Group

Use the Create Disk Group screen to create a disk group. From the Storage > Disk Group

screen, click the Create button to open the screen as shown.

Status This fi eld shows the status of the hot-spare disk.

This field shows the name of the disk group and whether it is normal, degraded, crashed,

Creating, Deleting, Expanding, Repairing or Changing the RAID type.

Normal: A green circle represents a healthy volume.

Degraded: An orange circle represents a degraded RAID 1 volume.

Crashed: A red circle represents a down volume.

The following status also displays the percentage of an action has been completed.

Creating: The NAS’s percentage progress in creating the volume.

Deleting: The NAS’s percentage progress in deleting the volume.

Expanding: The NAS’s percentage progress in expanding the volume. For a RAID 1

volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and the

evaluated remaining t ime.

Repairing: The NAS’s percentage progress in repairing the volume. For a RAID 1 volume,

this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished and the evaluated

remaining time.

Changing: The NAS’s percentage progress in changing the volume’s RAID type. For a

RAID 1 volume, this also displays the percentage of resynchronizing the NAS has finished

and the evaluated remaining time.

Disk Name This field shows the name of the hot-spare disk.

Size This field shows the total size of the hot-spare disk.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hot-spare disk.

Ta ble 16 Disk Group (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 44 Create Disk Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 17 Create Disk Group

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 1. Select Disks and RAID Type

Select disks This section lists all available hard disks in the table and displays the disk trays the hard

disks are currently installed in the graphic on the right.

Select one or more hard disks where you want to create a disk group. Use the check box

on the top to select or unselect all entries in this column.

Disk Name This field shows the name of the hard disk.

Size Thi s field shows the total di sk size.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hard disk.

Need Graphic!

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.6 Hard Disk

Use the Hard Disk screen to view all disk information. From the Storage screen, click Hard Disk

to open the screen as shown.

Choose a RAID

type Select a RAID type from the drop-down list box. The corresponding space al locations of

available size, data protection area, and wasted size display.

Use Basic with one disk.

Use JBOD with two or more disks for maximum capacity.

Use RAID 0 with two or four disks for maximum speed.

Use RAID 1 with two or more disks to mirror primary data to another disk(s) with high

performance.

Use RAID 5 with three or more disks to balance performance, hard disk capacity usage

with data protection in case of disk failure.

Use RAID 6 with four disks for more data protection in case of disk failure.

Use RAID 10 with four disks to get better performance than RAID 6, with sl ightly less

data protection.

See Table 8 on page 50 or Section 8.6 on page 98 for more information.

Note: Use the same capacity of hard disks for RAID 1, 5, 6, or 10 to avoid wasting space.

Back Click Back to go to the previous screen.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Step 2. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Disk Selected This field displays the hard disk(s) on which the RAID a rray will be built.

RAID Type This field displays the type of RAID on which the volume will be built.

V olume Type This field displays the type of the volume, Multiple volumes o n RAID (Disk Group X)

where Disk Group X is the disk group’s name.

Vo lume Capacity This field displays the size of the volume.

Back Click Back to go to the previous ste p.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Ta ble 17 Create Disk Group (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 45 Hard Disk

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

8.3.6.1 S.M.A.R.T

Use the S.M.A.R.T screens to view hard disk health indicators. Self Monitoring, Analysis, and

Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T) detects and reports the reliability of hard disks using standard

indicators (called “attributes”), to help you anticipate possible disk failures.

Note: The available S.M.A.R.T information varies from one hard disk vendor to another.

From the Internal Storage > Hard Disk screen, select a disk and click S.M.A.R.T to open the

screen as shown.

Ta ble 18 Hard Disk

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status This field shows the status of an installed hard disk.

Normal: A green circle displays. This represents the volume is functioning normally.

Crashed: A red circle displays. This represents the volume is down.

Disk Name This field shows the name of the hard disk.

Used by This field shows the name of a volume or disk group built on the hard disk if any. This field

also displays the RAID type the volume or disk group is using.

Size This field shows the total size of the hard disk.

Model Name This field shows the model of the hard disk.

Temperature This field shows the temperature of the hard disk in degrees celsius (oC) and fahrenheit (oF).

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 46 S.M.A.R.T Overview

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 19 S.M.A.R.T Overview

LABEL DESCRIPTION

A This shows the current status of the hard disk (a green circle with a check mark indicates

healthy).

B This shows the overall health of the hard disk based on S. M.A.R.T diagnostics.

C This shows the temperature of the hard disk in degrees celsius (oC) and fahrenheit (oF).

Performance This shows your hard disk’s performance (Good or Bad).

Power_On_H

ours This field shows the number of hou r s the hard disk h as been in power-on state since it was

produced.

Spin_Retry_C

ount This field shows the total number of spin start retry attempts. This is the number of attempts

to spin up to fully operational speed the hard drive has made when the first attempt did not

succeed. An incre ase in this value is an indicator of hard disk mechanical subsystem

problems.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.6.2 SMART Info

Use this screen to display more details information about the volume.

Click S.M.A.R.T Info in the S.M.A.R.T Ove rv iew screen to display the following.

Reallocated_

Sector_Ct This field shows the total number of reallocated sectors on the hard drive. When the hard

drive detects a read/write/verification error, it marks the sector as “reallocated” and transfers

the data to a specially reserved (spare) area. The process is also known as remapping with

“reallocated” sectors known as remaps. The more sectors the hard disk has to reallocate, the

slower read and write speeds become.

Command_

Timeout This field shows the temperature of the hard disk in degrees celsius (oC) and fahrenheit (oF).

Model Family This field shows the model family of the hard disk.

Device Model This field shows the hard disk model number that uniquely identifies a hard disk.

Serial

Number This field shows this individual hard disk’s serial number from the manufacturer.

LU WWN

Device Id This field shows the hard disk’s Logical Unit World Wide Name Device Identifier.

Firmware

Version This field shows the version number of the hard disk’s internal operating software.

User

Capacity This field shows the hard disk’s usable size.

Sector Sizes This field shows the sector size of the hard disk. A sector is the smallest physical storage unit

on a hard disk. Normally it is 512 bytes.

Rotation Rate This field shows the rotational speed of the hard disk, measured in revolutions pe r minute

(rpm).

ATA Version This field shows the hard disk’s Advanced Technology Attachment version number.

SATA Version This field shows the hard disk’s Serial ATA (SATA) version number.

Local Time This field shows the local time that the hard disk is using.

SMART

support This field shows whether or not the hard disk is SMART-capable.

SMART

support This field shows whether or not the hard disk has SMART monitoring turned on.

Close Click this button to close the screen.

Ta ble 19 S.M.A.R.T Overview (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 47 S.M.A.R.T Info

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 20 S.M.A.R.T Info

LABEL DESCRIPTION

ID This is the identifica tion numb er used to tag a hard disk attribute.

This is stan dard across all S.M.A.R.T-enabled storage devices. However it depends on the

storage vendor which attributes it will all ow S.M.A.R.T to diagn ose.

Attribute This refers to an attribute of the hard disk that S.M.A.R.T can assess. Attributes describe

the hard disk’s physical state, performance, wear-and-tear, and so on.

Value This is a value that corresponds to the Raw Data. Compare this wi th the Threshold.

S.M.A.R.T compresses the raw value(s) into a digit from 1 to 253, where 1 indicates the

worst scenario while 253 indicates the best scenario.

The values 100 or 200 usually represent the mean or normal value.

W orst This is the lowest value attained by the hard disk since S.M.A.R.T started its assessment of

the hard disk.

Threshold Th is is the attr ibute’s threshold value. If the attribute’s current normali zed value is less

than or equal to th e threshold, the attribute has faile d. An attribute v alue close to or below

the threshold indicates the hard drive is no longer reliable.

Type This shows S.M.A.R.T’s assessment of the hard dis k.

Old_age indicates end-of-product life from old-age (normal wearing out) if the attribute

value is less than or equal to the threshold.

Pre-fail indicate imminent hard drive failure if the attribute value is less than or equal to

the threshold.

Note that just because an attribute is of the Pre-fail type doe s not mean your hard driv e is

ready to fail. It only means this if the current normalized value of the attribute is less than

or equal to the th reshold.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.3.6.3 S.M.A.R.T Attributes

The following table describes some common S.M.A.R.T. attributes. If a higher or lower raw attribute

value is better, it is indicated in the BETTER column. Since S.M.A.R.T. attributes and their

definitions vary by manufacturer, refer to the hard drive manufacturer for details about the

attributes your hard drive supports.

Updated This indicates when the hard drive updates the value for this attribute.

•Always means the hard drive updates this attribute during normal operation and

during offline activities.

•Offline means the hard drive only updates this attribute when no one is accessing the

hard drive.

When Failed This column in dicates when (if ever) the attribute failed. An attribute has failed if the

normalized value is less than or equal to the threshold.

•-: This displays if the attribute is not failing now and has neve r failed in the past.

•FAILING_NOW: This displays if the attribute’ s current normal ized value is less than or

equal to the threshold.

•In_the_past: This displays if the attribute’s current normalized value is greater than

the threshold but the worst recorded value is less than or equal to the threshold.

Raw Data This is the attribute’s unprocessed raw data. These values show exact amounts of time or

numbers of attempts or errors. The meaning to the raw values is specific to the hard drive

manufacturer. Table 42 on page 156 has some information about whether a higher or lower

individual raw S.M.A.R.T. attribute value is better.

Close Click this button to close the screen.

Ta ble 20 S.M.A.R.T Info

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 21 S.M.A.R.T. Attributes

ID ATTRIBUTE

NAME BETTER DESCRIPTION

01 Read Error Rate Low Shows the rate of hardware read errors. If this is not zero, there is a

problem with the disk surface or the read/write heads.

02 Throughput

Performance High This is the hard drive’s general (overall) throughput performance. A

decreasing value indicates a problem.

03 Spin-Up Time Low This is the av erage n umber of mill iseconds th e hard drive took for spindle

spin up (from zero RPM to fully operational).

04 Start/Stop Count The total number of spindle start and stop cycles.

05 Reallocated

Sectors Count Low Total number of reallocated sectors on the hard drive. When the hard

drive detects a read/write/verification error, it marks the sector as

“reallocated” and transfers the data to a specially reserved (spare) area.

The process is also known as remapping with “reallocated” sectors known

as remaps. The more sectors the hard drive has to reallocate, the slower

read and write speeds become.

06 Read Channel

Margin This is the margin of a channel when it reads data.

07 Seek Error Rate Low This is the rate of the magnetic heads’ seek errors. A failure in the

mechanical positioning system, such as servo damage or a thermal

widening of the disk, results in seek errors. An increas ing number of s eek

errors indicate the condition of the disk surface and the mechanical

subsystem are worsening.

08 Seek Time

Performance High This is an average performance indicator for the seek operations of the

magnetic heads. Mechanical subsystem problems cause this value to

decrease.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

09 Power-On Hours

(POH) Low This is how many hours the hard drive has been in a power-on state. The

raw value lists the total number of hours (or minutes, or seconds

depending on the manufacturer).

10 Spin Retry Count Low This is the total number of spin start retr y attempts. This is the number of

attempts to spin up to fully operational speed the hard drive has made

when the first atte mpt did not succeed. An increase in this value is an

indicator of hard disk mechanical subsystem problems.

11 Recalibration

Retries High This is the number of times recalibration was requested when the first

attempt did not succeed. A decrease in this value is an indicator of hard

disk mechanical subsystem problems.

12 Device Power

Cycle Count This is the number of times the hard drive has gone through a full power

on and power off.

13 Soft Read Error

Rate Low This is the number of uncorrected read errors the hard drive has

reported. If this is not zero, back up your data.

190 Airflow

Temperature Low This indicates the temperature of the airflow me asured by a Western

Digital hard drive.

190 Temperature

Difference from

100

High This indicates the value of 100 - the temperature in degrees Celsius.

Manufacturers can set a minimum threshold that corresponds to a

maximum temperature.

191 G-sense error

rate Low This is the number of mistakes caused by impact loads.

192 Power-off Retract

Count Low This is how many time s the heads are loaded off the media.

193 Load/Unload

Cycle Low This is the number of load and unload cycles into head landing zone

position.

194 Temperature Low This is the hard drive’s internal temperature.

195 H ardware ECC

Recovered High This is the ti me between ECC (Error Correction Code)-corrected errors.

196 Reallocation

Event Count Low This is the total number of reallo cation (remap) operations. The raw v alue

is the total attempts to move data from reallocated sectors to a spare

area. Successful and unsuccessful att empts are both included.

197 Current Pending

Sector Count Low This is the number of unstable sectors awaiting reallocation. If the sector

is later successfully written or read, this value decreases and reallocation

is not performed. Only failed write attempts cause a reallocation, not read

errors. This can be difficult to test since only direct I/O writes to the disk

cause reallocations, not cached writes.

198 Uncorrectable

Sector Count Low This is the number of errors reading or writing a sector that were not

correctable. An increase in this value is an indicator of disk surface

defects or mechanical subsystem problems.

199 UltraDMA CRC

Error Count Low This is the number of data transfer errors through the interface cable

according to the ICRC (Interface Cyclic Redundancy Check).

200 Write Error Rate

/ Multi-Zone

Error Rate

Low This is the total number of errors in writing sectors.

201 S oft Read Error

Rate Low This is the number of read/write head off-track errors. If the value is not

zero, make a backup.

202 Data Address

Mark Errors Low This is the number of data address mark errors. This could also be a

different, manufacturer-specific attribute.

203 Run Out Cancel Low This is the number of ECC (Error Correction Code) errors.

Ta ble 21 S.M.A.R.T. Attributes (continued)

ID ATTRIBUTE

NAME BETTER DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.4 iSCSI

The NAS supports the iSCSI (Internet Small Computer System Interface) standard and can serve as

an iSCSI target. When the iSCSI initiator is successfully connected to an iSCSI target over an IP

204 Soft ECC

Correction Low This is the number of errors corrected by software ECC (Error Correction

Code).

205 Thermal Asperity

Rate (TAR) Low This is the number of thermal asperity errors. Thermal asperity is a read

signal spike caused by sensor temperature rise due to touching the disk

surface or contaminant pa rticles.

206 Flying Height This is the height of the hard drive’s read/write heads above the disk

surface.

207 Spin High

Current This is the quanti ty of high current used to spin up the drive.

208 S pin Buzz This is the number of buzz routines to spin up the drive. When the arm

holding the read/write heads is stuck, the motor driving it tries to oscillate

the arm to free it. This causes an audible vibration.

209 Offline Seek

Performance This is the hard drive’ s seek performance during offline operations. Offl ine

operations are tests the drive does itself as opposed to those that an

external diagnostic tool has it do. Seek performance is how quickly the

drive moves from track to track.

220 Disk Shift Low This is how far the disk has moved relative to the spindle (this kind of

shift is usually due to shock).

221 G-Sense Error

Rate Low This is the number of errors that have resulted from external vibration

and shock.

222 Loaded Hours This is how long the hard drive has operated under data load (this

requires movement of the magnetic head armature).

223 Load/Unload

Retry Count This is how many time the magnetic head has changed position.

224 Load Friction Low This is resistance caused by friction in mechanical parts during operation.

225 Load/Unload

Cycle Count Low This is the total number of load cycles.

226 Load 'In'-time This is the total time th at the magnetic heads actuator has had a load

(not been in the parking area).

227 Torque

Amplification

Count

Low This is the number of attempts to compensate for variations in platter

speed.

228 Power-Off

Retract Cycle Low This is how many times the magnetic armature was automatically

retracted because the power was cut.

230 GMR Head

Amplitude This is the amplitude of thrashing (or the distance of repetitive forward

and reverse head motion).

231 Temperature Low This is the hard drive’s temperature.

240 Head Flying

Hours This is the total time that the head has been positionin g.

250 Read Error Retry

Rate Low This is the numbe r of errors in reading from the disk.

Ta ble 21 S.M.A.R.T. Attributes (continued)

ID ATTRIBUTE

NAME BETTER DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

network, data transmission and storage manage ment can be processed through the network. In

other words, you can access and manage the target the same way as a locally attached drive.

In the following example, a branch office has a NAS named NAS1. You want to expand your data

storage capacity by accessing an iSCSI LUN (Logical Unit Number) volume called VOL1 on NAS1

over the Internet. Yo ur computer is the iSCSI initiator and the NAS is the iSCSI target. When the

initiator is successfully connected to the target, y our computer can use VOL1 on the NAS as its own

internal storage.

The configuration steps are as follows:

1Create an iSCSI LUN Volume for the iSCSI target in NAS1.

2Configure NAS1 as an iSCSI target.

Figure 48 iSCSI Connection Example

8.4.1 iSCSI LUNs Screens

This section enables you to create, up-map, and delete LUN volumes, as well as display the

volumes’ information. Click Storage Manager > iSCSI > iSCSI LUNs to display the following

screen.

LAN WAN

NAS1

VOL1

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 49 Storage Manager > iSCSI > iSCSI LUNs

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 22 iSCSI > iSCSI LUNs

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Create Click this to create a new LUN on a volume.

See more details on Section 8.4.1.1 on page 84.

Un-map Click this to open the following screen where you can up-map the LUN from the iSCSI target.

Key in UN-MAP and click Un-map to un-map the LUN from the iSCSI target. Click Cancel to

close this screen.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.4.1.1 Creating a New LUN

A LUN is a unit of storage shared over iSCSI that can be mapped to an iSCSI target. You must

create an iSCSI LUN volume before you configure an iSCSI target for it. Click Create in the iSCSI

LUNs section of the Storage Manager > iSCSI screen to open the screens as shown.

Delete Click this to open the follow ing screen where you ca n delete an existing LUN.

Key in DELETE and click Delete to remove an existing LUN. Click Cancel to close this screen.

Info Click this item to check detailed information about the LUN.

Name - Displays the name of the LUN.

Location - Displays the name of the volume the LUN is located in.

Capacity - Displays the size of the LU N.

Allocation mode - Displays the allocation method the LUN applies.

Write Back - Displays whether the write back feature is enabled or disabled.

Mapped iSCSI Target - Displays the iS CSI target name the LUN is mapped to.

Ta ble 22 iSCSI > iSCSI LUNs (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 50 Creating a New LUN

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

The following table describes the labels in these screens.

8.4.2 iSCSI Ta rgets Screens

The iSCSI target refers to the storage resource that is actually attached to the iSCSI storage

device. The initiator can manage the assigned disk volume on the iSCSI target ov er the Internet as

if it was the initiator’s internal storage volume.

iSCSI Targets allows you to create, edit, and delete an iSCSI target and map a target to an

existing LUN. Click Storage Manager > iSCSI > iSCSI Targets to show the following screen.

Ta ble 23 Create a New LUN

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 1. Set Up LUN Properties

Name Type a LUN name in this field.

Note: Valid characters for the name are 0-9, a-z, and A-Z, and the maximum length is 30

characters. The “-” symbol is allowed as well, but cannot be the first character.

Location Sel ect a volume to create the LUN on.

Capacity Type the size of the LUN in this field.

Allocation Mode Select the method the NAS uses to allocate storage space to the LUN.

Thin provisioning - Allocate space only when an initiator writes data to it.

Instant allocation - Allocate the specified disk space to the LUN when you create the

LUN.

Enable Write Back Select this option to increase the write performance. Write Back is a feature that collects

data in the hard disk’s cache memory first and permanently writes data into the hard

disk when the system is idle.

Note: It also creates a serious data integrity hazard. Data loss may occur if the NAS

experiences unexpected power loss before it has time to write the cached data to

the hard disk.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Step 2. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Name Displays the name of the LUN.

Location Displays th e name of the volume the LUN is located in.

Capacity Displays the size of the LUN.

Allocation Mode Displays the allocation method the LUN applies.

Write Back Displays whet her the Write Back feature is enabled or disabled.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 51 Storage Manager > iSCSI > iSCSI Targets

The following table describes the labels in these screens.

Ta ble 24 iSCSI > iSCSI Targets

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Create Click this to create a new iSCSI target.

See more details on Section 8.4.2.1 on page 88.

Edit Click this to modify the configuration of the iSCSI target.

See more detailed on Section 8.4.2.2 on page 92.

Disable /

Enable Disable - Click this to open the following screen where you can deactivate an exis ting target.

Key in DISABLE and click Disable to deactivate the target. Click Cancel to close this screen.

Enable - When the iSCSI is disabled, click Enable will activate the target.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.4.2.1 Creating a New Target

Click Create in the iSCSI Targets section of the Storage Manager > iSCSI screen to open the

screens as shown.

Delete Click this to o p en the following screen where you can delete an existing target.

Key in DELETE and click Delete to remove an existing target. Click Cancel to close this

screen.

Info Click this item to check detailed information abou t th e target.

Name - Displays the created target name.

IQN - Displays the target’s iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) format.

Allowed initiator (IQN) - Displays the allowed initiato r’s iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN)

format.

Authentication - Displays the authenti cation method t he target applies.

CRC Checksum - Displays the data transmission error detecting technique.

Maximum receive segment bytes - D isplays the max im um data segment length in bytes

that the iSCSI target can receive.

Maximum send segment bytes - Displa ys the maximum data s egment l ength in b ytes t hat

the iSCSI target can send. This feature is for the NAS326 only.

Mapped iSCSI Luns - Displays the LUNs mapped with the target.

Ta ble 24 iSCSI > iSCSI Targets (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Note: The NAS can create only 10 targets at maximum.

Figure 52 Creating a new LUN

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

The following table describes the labels in these screens.

Ta ble 25 Create a New Target

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 1. Set Up Target Properties

Name Enter the name of your iSCSI target.

Note: Valid characters for the name are 0-9, a-z, and A-Z, and the maximum length is 30

characters. The “-” symbol is allowed as well, but cannot be the first character.

IQN The iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN ) of t he targe t is au tom ati cal ly ge ne rated after you ent er

the target name.

Allowed initiator

(IQN) The allowed initiator name is in the iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) format.

To check the initiator name, open the iSCSI Initiator program on your computer. Select

the Configuration tab and you can see the initiator name as shown in the following

screen.

Note: If you use your computer as the iSCSI initiator, download and install the iSCSI

Initiator first. For example, use Microsoft iSCSI Software Initiator with a Microsoft

OS or globalSAN iSCSI Initiator with MAC OS.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

CHAP If the iSCSI target has configured Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP)

here, the initiator needs to enter the secret before the initiator connects to the target.

The target will authenticate the initi a tor with the username and password (shared

secret). The connection fails if the us ername and password are not entered correctly.

Username - The user name is for the initiator to authenticate the initiator when

attempti ng connection.

Password - The password is for th e target to authentic ate the initiator wh en attempting

connection.

Confirm password - Re-type the password to make sure you entered it correctly.

Note: Valid characters for password are 0-9, a-z, and A-Z.

Enable mutual

CHAP Mutual CHAP is a two-way authenticat ion between the iSCSI initi a tor and the target. If

the initiator has confi g ured CHAP authentication, the target must enter the secret that’s

set up by the initiator when attempting connection.

Select this check box to perform mutual CHAP on the target.

Username - The user name is for the initiator to authenticate the initiator when

attempti ng connection.

Password - The password is for th e target to authentic ate the initiator wh en attempting

connection.

Confirm password - Re-type the password to make sure you entered it correctly.

Note: Valid characters for password are 0-9, a-z, and A-Z.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Step 2. Map iSCSI LUNs

Use this screen to map the iSCSI target to an existing LUN.

Note: One iSCSI target can map to several LUN, but one LUN can only map to one target.

Status Displays the status of the iSCSI LUN(s).

LUN Name Displays the LUN name.

Capacity Displays the size of the iSCSI LUN(s).

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Next Click Next to go to the next step.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Step 3. Summary

Use this screen to review the settings you configured in the last step.

Name Displays the iSCSI target name.

IQN Displays the IQ N of the tar get.

Allowed initiator

(IQN) Displays the IQN of the allowed initiator.

Authentication Displays the CHAP au thentication method the target applies.

Mapped iSCSI

LUNs Displays the iSCSI LUN the target maps to.

Back Click Back to go to the previous step.

Ta ble 25 Create a New Target (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.4.2.2 Editing a Created Target

You can edit iSCSI target settings such as allowed initiator (IQN), CHAP, and CRC checksum after

you create a target. Click Storage Manager > iSCSI Targets and select Edit to open the

following screens.

Properties

The Properties screen allows you to edit the allowed initiator (IQN), CHAP authentication features

as shown in the following screen.

Figure 53 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Properties

Apply Click Apply to save the settings.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Ta ble 25 Create a New Target (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 26 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Properties

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name Displays the name of your iSCSI target.

IQN Dis plays the iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) of th e target.

Allowed initiator

(IQN) The allowed initiator name is in the iSCSI Qualified Name (IQN) format. You can connect

with another initiator by changing the allowed initiator IQN.

The system will display a prompt if you enter a n invalid character or username of

unacceptable length in this fi eld.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Map iSCSI LUNs

If the existing iSCSI target doesn’t map to any iSCSI LUN, go to Map iSCSI LUNs to configure the

mapping.

Figure 54 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Map iSCSI LUNs

CHAP Username - The user name is for the initiator to authenticate the initiator when

attempti ng connection.

Password - The password is for th e target to authentic ate the initiator wh en attempting

connection.

Confirm password - Re-type the password to make sure you entered it correctly.

Note: Valid characters for password are 0-9, a-z, and A-Z, and the valid length is 12-14

characters.

Enable mutual

CHAP Select this check box to perform mutual CHAP on the target.

Username - The user name is for the target to authenticate the in itiator when

attempti ng connection.

Password - The password is for th e target to authentic ate the initiator wh en attempting

connection.

Confirm password - Re-type the password to make sure you entered it correctly.

Note: Valid characters for password are 0-9, a-z, and A-Z, and the valid length is 12-14

characters.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Ta ble 26 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Properties (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Advanced

Go to Advanced screen for other configurations such as CRC checksum and maximum receive/

send segments.

Figure 55 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Advanced

Ta ble 27 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Map iSCSI LUNs

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status Displays the status of the iSCSI LUN.

LUN Name Displays the iSCSI LUN name.

Capacity Displays the size of the iSCSI LUN.

Apply Select the check to choose a LUN, and click Apply to save your changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Ta ble 28 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Advanced

LABEL DESCRIPTION

CRC checksum Cyclic R edundancy Check (CRC) checksum is a technique for detecti ng data transmi ssion

errors. It ensures correct data transmissions between the initiator and the target. If you

select the Data/Header Digest, the iSCSI initiator will be verified by these parameters

when transmitting data.

Data digest Select the check box to enable data digest. The data digest protects the integrity of the

data.

Header digest Select the check bo x to e nable header digest. The header digest protects the integri ty of

the header.

Maximum receive

segment bytes Select the maximum receive segments allowed in bytes.

Four options are applied: 262144, 65536, 9182, 4092.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.5 External Storage

This chapter covers the management of external volumes and disks.

Use the External Storage screen (Section 8.5.2 on page 95) to display information on all external

volumes, configure volumes’ name and format volumes.

8.5.1 What You Need to Know About External Storage

Disk

USB-attached storage disks and SD cards are treated as external disks/volumes.

Volume

A volume is a stor age area on a disk or disks. You can create volumes on SD cards or external disks

attached to the USB ports. You cannot spread a volume across external disks like you can with

internal disks.

8.5.2 External Storage Screen

Click Storage Manager > External Storage in the navigation panel to display the following

screen. Use this screen to format and edit external volumes on USB-connected storage and SD

cards.

Maximum send

segment bytes Select the maximum send segments allowed in bytes.

Four options are applied: 262144, 65536, 9182, 4092.

Note: This feature is for the NAS326 only.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes.

Cancel Click Cancel to close the scree n without saving any settings.

Ta ble 28 iSCSI Targets > Edit > Advanced (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 56 Storage Manager > External Storage

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 29 Storage Manager > External Storage

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Format Click this to format the connected USB disk.

See Section 8.5.3 on page 97 for more information.

Edit Click this to modify the volume name.

Volume name -

• Type a volume name from 1 to 31 characters.

• Acceptable characters are all alphanumeric characters and " " [spaces], "_"

[underscores], and "." [periods].

• The first character must be alphanumeric (A-Z 0-9).

• The last character cannot be a space " ".

Apply - Click this to save your change and rename the volume.

Cancel - Click this to exit this screen without saving c hanges.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

8.5.3 Format the Volume

This allows you to format the connected USB disk. Click External Storage > Format to show the

following screen.

Note: F ormatting the di sk will also delete all y our data in the USB drive. If the connected

external volume has more than one partition, you can choose which partition you

want to format.

Eject Click this to eject the external volume.

Click Yes to eject the volume or No to exit this screen without saving changes.

Status This field shows whether the volume is Normal, Unsupported, or Unformatted.

Normal means the USB connected device is functioning properly.

Unsupported means the USB connected device uses a file system the NAS does not

support.

Unformatted means the USB connected device is not formatted with a file system.

Note: There is no explicit message from CIFS that tells users their volume is degraded or

down.

V olume Name This field dis plays the volume name. If the s tatus is Unsupported or Unformatted, the

volume name displays “--”.

File System This field displays the file system that an external (USB or SD) volume is using.

Disk(s) This field shows to which USB port the disk is connected.

Capacity This field shows total disk size, the percentage of the volume being used and the

percentage that is available. If the status is Unsupported, the capacity displays

“Unknown”. If the status is Unformatted, the capacity displays “--”.

Shared Folder This field displays the folder that shares files. Roll your mouse over the link and click it to

display the files in th e File Browser.

Ta ble 29 Storage Manager > External Storage (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

Figure 57 External Storage > Format

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

8.6 Technical Reference

This section contains background on JBOD and the RAID levels used on the NAS.

JBOD

• Minimum number of disks: 1

• Total capacity: Sum of the member disks

• Advantages: Maximum storage capacity, especially for disks of mixed sizes. Flexibility (you can

add disks to the JBOD

• Disadvantages: Not as fast or reliable as RAID.

JBOD allows you to combine multiple physical disk drives into a single virtual one, so they appear

as a single large disk. JBOD can be used to turn several different -sized drives into one big drive. For

Ta ble 30 External Storage > Format

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Volume Name Type a volume name from 1 to 31 characters.

Acceptable characters are all alphanumeric characters and " " [spaces], "_" [underscores],

and "." [periods].

The first character must be alphanumeric (A-Z 0-9).

The last character cannot be a space " ".

File System Select the file system you want the new volume to use.

Windows file systems

NTFS: Recommended.

FAT32: Newer, and more efficient than FAT16. Supports a volume size of up to 2 TB

(Tera Bytes) and individual file sizes of up to 4 GB.

exFAT: Designed to bridge the gap between the NTFS file system and the older FAT32

file system. It is a 64-bit file system that can store files over 4 GB.

Linux file systems

EXT2: Older file system.

EXT3: The same as EXT2, but adds a journaled file system and is more robust.

EXT4: Supports larger files and better performance than EXT3.

Apply Click this to save your changes and format the disk.

Cancel Click this to exit this screen without saving changes.

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

example, JBOD could convert 100 GB, 200 GB, 250 GB, and 500 GB drives into one large logical

drive of 1050 GB. Since data isn’t striped across disks, if one disk fails, you should just lose the

data on that disk (but you may lose data in the whole array depending on the nature of the disk

failure). You can add disks to the JBOD array later (using the Add disk to JBOD feature) and even

remove them so JBOD offers a lot of flexibility. However JBOD read performance is not as good as

RAID as only one disk can be read at a time and they must be read sequentially. The following

figure shows three disks in a single JBOD array. Data is not written across disks but written

sequentially to each disk until it’s full.

RAID 0

RAID 0 spreads data across two or more disks (data striping) with no mirroring nor parity for data

redundancy, so if one disk fails the entire array will be lost. The major benefit of RAID 0 is

performance. The following figure shows two disks in a single RAID 0 array. Data can be written and

read across disks simultaneously for faster performance.

RAID 0 capacity is the size of the sum of the capacities of the disks in the RAID 0. For example, if

you have four disks of sizes 1 TB, 2 TB, 3 TB and 2 TB respectively in one RAID 0 array, then the

maximum capacity is 8 TB.

Typical applications for RAID 0 are non-critical data (or data that changes infrequently and is

backed up regularly) requiring high write speed such as audio, video, graphics, games and so on.

RAID 1

RAID 1 creates an exact copy (or mirror) of a set of data on another disk. This is useful when data

backup is more important than data capacity. The following figure shows two disks in a single RAID

Ta ble 31 JBOD

A1 B1 C1

A2 B2 C2

A3 B3 C3

A4 B4 C4

DISK 1 DISK 2 DISK 3

Ta ble 32 RAID 0

A1 A2

A3 A4

A5 A6

A7 A8

DISK 1 DISK 2

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

100

1 array with mirrored data. Data is duplicated across two disks, so if one disk fails, there is still a

copy of the data.

As RAID 1 uses mirroring and duplexing, a RAID 1 array needs an even number of disks (two or

four for the NAS).

RAID 1 capacity is limited to the size of the smallest disk in the RAID array. For example, if you

have two disks of sizes 150 GB and 200 GB respectively in one RAID 1 array, then the maximum

capacity is 150 GB and the remaining space (50 GB) is unused.

Typical applications for RAID 1 are those requiring high fault tolerance without need of large

amounts of storage capacity or top performance, for example, accounting and financial data, small

database systems, and enterprise servers.

RAID 6

RAID 6 can tolerate two simultaneous drive failures by calculating dual distributed parity data on

striped data across disks. Dual parity provides extra data protection, however, it is slower to write

than most other RAID levels.

RAID 6 uses parity to store redundant data on space equal to the size of two disks for later data

recovery. Therefore, on a RAID 6 arra y, only 50% of the space is available as usable capacity. If you

have four disks of sizes 1TB, 1TB, 2TB, 2TB respectively in one RAID 6 array, then the maximum

capacity of the array is the capacity of the smallest drive (1TB, 1TB, 2TB, 2TB) * (Number of disks

- 2) = 1TB * (4-2) = 2TB. The remaining space (2 TB) is unused.

Ta ble 33 RAID 1

A1 A1

A2 A2

A3 A3

A4 A4

DISK 1 DISK 2

Ta ble 34 RAID 6

RAID 6

A1 A2 AP AQ

B1 BP BQ B2

CP CQ C1 C2

DQ D1 D2 DP

DISK 1 DISK 2 DISK 3 DISK 4

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

101

RAID 10

RAID 10 (RAID 1+0) is a nested RAID where two RAID 1 arrays are stored on the physical disks

with a RAID 0 array on top. It is a stripe of mirrors. RAID 1 provides redundancy while RAID 0

boosts performance. The following figure shows two disks in two RAID 1 arrays. Data is duplicated

across two disks, so if one disk fails, there is still a copy of the data. These two arrays are

configured as a single RAID 0 array for faster performance.

Typical applications for RAID 10 are those requiring both high performance and reliability such as

enterprise servers and high-end moderate-sized database systems. RAID 10 is often used in place

of RAID 1 or RAID 5 by those requiring higher performance. It may be used instead of RAID 1 for

applications requiring more capacity.

RAID 5

RAID 5 pro vi d es the be st bal anc e of ca pac ity and performance while providing data redundancy. It

provides redundancy by striping data across three disks and keeps the parity information (AP) on

the fourth disk (in each stripe). In case of disk failure, data can be recovered from the surviving

disks using the parity information. When you replace the failed disk, the reconstructed data is

written onto the new disk. Re-synchronize the array to have it return to its original state. The

following example shows data stripped across three disks (A1 to A3 in the first strip for example)

with parity information (AP) on the fourth disk.

The capacity of a RAID 5 array is the smallest disk in the RAID set multiplied by one less than the

number of disks in the RAID set. For example, if you have four disks of sizes 150 GB, 150 GB, 200

Ta ble 35 RAID 10

RAID 0

RAID 1 RAID 1

A1 A1 A2 A2

A3 A3 A4 A4

A5 A5 A6 A6

A7 A7 A8 A8

DISK 1 DISK 2 DISK 3 DISK 4

Ta ble 36 RAID 5

A1 A2 A3 AP

B1 B2 BP B3

C1 CP C2 C3

DP D1 D2 D3

DISK 1 DISK 2 DISK 3 DISK 4

Chapter 8 Storage Manager

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

102

GB and 250 GB respectively in one RAID 5 array, then the maximum capacity is 450 GB (3 * 150

GB, the smallest disk size) and the remaining space (300 GB) is unused.

Typical applications for RAID 10 are transaction processing, relational database applications,

enterprise resource planning and other business systems. For write-intensive applications, RAID 1

or RAID 1+0 are probably better choices, as the performance of RAID 5 will begin to substantially

decrease in a write-heavy environment.

Hot-spare

A RAID 1 or RAID 5 array with a hot-spare oper ates as a three-disk RAID 1 or RAID 5 array with the

fourth disk on standby. The standby disk automatically comes into play if a disk in the array fails.

The advantage of a ho t-spare is that if a disk fails, then the array resynchron izes automatically with

the standby disk and operates at healthy array speed after the resynchronization.

Note: You need four hard disks installed to use RAID 10, RAID 5 or RAID 5 with hot-

spare.

RAID and Data Protection

If a hard disk fails and you’re using a RAID 1, RAID 10, or RAID 5 array then your data will still be

av ailable (but at degraded speeds until y ou replace the hard disk that failed and re-synchronize the

array). However, RAID cannot protect against file corruption, virus attacks, files incorrectly deleted

or modified, or the NAS malfunctioning.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

103

CHAPTER 9

Status Center

9.1 Overview

Status Center displays the system information or network connection status.

9.1.1 System Information

In the Desktop screen, click Status Center to display System Information for detailed NAS

status information.

Figure 58 Status Center > System Information

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 37 Status Center > System Information

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Refresh Click the Refresh icon to update this display.

Status The circular icon displays the health state of the NAS. A green circle with a c heck

mark indicates healthy.

Server Name This displays the name which helps you find the NAS on the network.

Model Name This displays which model this NAS device is .

Firmware Version This is the NAS firmware version.

Chapter 9 Status Center

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

104

9.1.2 Network

The Network screen display the NAS connection status. From Status Center screen, click

Network to open the screen as shown.

Figure 59 Status Center > System Information

LAN1 MAC Address This displays the NAS’s unique physical hardware address (MAC) for the LAN1

Ethernet port. Y ou need the MAC address to register the product at myZyXEL.com.

Customer support may also request it for troubleshooting purposes.

LAN2 MAC Address This displays the NAS’s unique physical hardware address (MAC) for the LAN2

Ethernet port.

CPU This displays a summary of CPU usage by all current proces se s.

Note: If too many users are using the NAS then the NAS may appear sluggish.

Memory This shows how much of the NAS's total memory is being used.

Process Name This displays the top 10 processes that occupy the most CPU usage.

CPU Usage This displays a summary of CPU usage by all current processes.

Memory Usage This shows how much of the NAS's total memory is being used.

CPU Temperature This displays the temperature near the NAS’s CPU. The NAS generates an

emergency log if the temperature goes out of the normal operating range. If the

temperature goes even higher, the NAS shuts down automatically to avoid

damage from overheating. If the NAS overheats, make sure the fans are working

and it is in a well ventilated place.

Fan Speed This is the RPM (Rotations Per Minute) of the NAS’s fans.

Ta ble 37 Status Center > System Information (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 9 Status Center

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

105

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 38 Status Center > Network

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Type Displays the type of the user acco unt.

User Displays the user name.

Groups Displays the group the current user belongs to.

WAN/LAN Displays whether the connection is from the WAN or the LAN.

Service Name Displays the service name.

IP Address Displays the IP address of the user.

Time Displays the connection time.

Delete Click this to disconnect the user.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

106

CHAPTER 10

Control Panel

10.1 Overview

This chapter discusses the Control Panel screens. Use the Control Panel screens to configure

network settings and upload firmware.

10.2 What You Can Do

•Use the TCP/IP screen (Section 10.4 on page 107) to configure the NAS’s TCP/IP network

connection settings such as the teaming mode and IP addresses.

•Use the PPPoE screen (Section 10.4.2.2 on page 111) to configure PPPoE settings for a direct

Internet connection.

•Use the UPnP Port Mapping screen (Section 10. 5 on page 113) to automatically configure your

Internet gateway’s firewall and Network Address Translation (NAT) to allow access to the NAS

from the Internet.

•Use the Terminal screen (Section 10.6 on page 119) to enable or disable Telnet and SSH access.

•Use the DyDNS screen (Section 10.7 on page 120) to configure the domain name settings of

your NAS.

•Use the FW Upgrade screen (Section 10.8 on page 122) to upload new firmware.

10.3 What You Need to Know

IP Address

The NAS needs an IP address to communicate with other devices on your network. The NAS can get

an IP address automatically if you have a device on your network that gives them out. Or you can

assign the NAS a static (fixed) IP address.

DNS Server Address

A DNS (Domain Name System) server maps domain names (like www.zyxel.com) to their

corresponding numerical IP addresses. This lets you use domain names to access web sites without

having to know their IP addresses. The NAS can receive the IP address of a DNS server

automatically (along with the NAS’s own IP address). You can also manually enter a DNS server IP

address in the NAS.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

107

PPPoE

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) allows the NAS to establish a direct Internet

connection if you do not have a router. PPPoE is a dial-up connection. You need a username and

password from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to set up the connection.

10.4 TCP/IP Screens

Use the TCP/IP screens to have the NAS use a dynamic or static IP address, subnet mask, default

gateway, PPPoE and DNS servers, and to test the network connection.

10.4.1 Configuring General TCP/IP Settings

Click Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > General Settings in the navigation panel to open

the following screen. This screen allows you to configure the default gateway and DNS server.

Note: If you change the NAS’s IP address, you need to log in again after you apply

changes.

Figure 60 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > General Settings

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

108

The following table describes the labels in this screen

10.4.2 Configuring Network Interface

Use the Network Interface screen to edit the IPv4 or IPv6 settings of LAN 1 and LAN 2, set up

port trunking, and configure PPPoE settings. Click Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP >

Network Interface in the navigation panel to open the following screen.

Figure 61 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Interface

Ta ble 39 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > General Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Default Gateway Select the LAN i n terface to use as the default gateway.

DNS Server DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP

address an d vice versa. If you have the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s), enter

them.

Automatically Select the option to have the NAS get a DNS server address automatically.

Manually Select this option to choose a static DNS server address. Type the DNS server IP

address(es) into the fields below.

Primary DNS

Server Type a primary DNS server IP address.

Secondary DNS

Server Type a secondary DNS se rver IP address.

Apply Click this to save your TCP/IP configurations. After you click Apply, the NAS restarts.

Wa it until you see the Login screen or until the NAS fully boots and then use the NAS

Starter Utility to rediscover it.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

109

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 40 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Interface

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status Display data transmission rate and transmission system.

Interface Displ ay the interface name.

IP Settings Display the IP settings (automatically or manually) of an interface.

IP Address Display the IP address of an interface.

Subnet Mask Display the subnet mask of an interface.

Create Click it to open the following screen to set up a port trunking.

For adding a port trunking, see Section 10.4.2.1 on page 110.

Automatically Select this option to have the interface ge t IP address information automatically.

If no IP address information is assigned, the NAS uses Auto-IP to assign itself an IP

address and subnet mask. For example, you could connect the NAS directly t o your

computer. If the computer is also set to get an IP addres s au to matically, the computer

and the NAS will choose addresses for themselves and be able to com municate.

Manually Select this option for the interface to use fixed TCP/IP information. You must fill in the

following fields.

IP Address - Type an IP address in this field.

Subnet Mask - Type an IP subnet mask in this field.

Default Gateway - Type a default gateway address in this field.

Create Click this to save t he settings and create a port trunk.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Edit Click this to modify the IPv4 or IPv6 settings of LAN 1 and LAN 2.

For editing the PPPoE settings, see Section 10.4.2.2 on page 111.

IPv4 Settings Click this to configure the following IPv4 settings.

Automatically - Select this option to have the interface get IP address information

automatically.

Manually - Select this option for the interface to use fixed TCP/IP information.

•IP Address - Type an IP address in this field.

•Subnet Mask - Type an IP subnet mask in this field.

•Default Gateway - Type a default gateway address in this field.

IPv6 Settings Click this to configure the following IPv6 settings.

Mode -

• Select Auto to have the D evice use th e IPv6 prefix from the connected router’s

Router Advertisement (RA) to generate an IPv6 address.

• Select Manual if you have a fixed IPv6 address assigned by your ISP.

• Select Disable to not assign any IPv6 address for the NAS.

Address - Enter the IPv 6 address assigned by your ISP.

Subnet prefix length - Enter the address prefix length to specify how many most

significant bits in an IPv6 address compose the network address. The range is 0 to 128

Default Gateway - Enter the IP address of the next-hop gateway. The gateway is a

router or switch on the same segment as your Device's interface(s). The gateway helps

forward packets to their destinations.

Apply Click this to save your TCP/IP configurations. After you click Apply, the NAS restarts.

Wa it until you see the Login screen or until the NAS fully boots and then use the NAS

Starter Utility to rediscover it.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

110

10.4.2.1 Creating a Port Trunking

Link Aggregation: Link aggregation combines LAN1 and LAN2 into a single logical link with

greater bandwidth. Both interfaces use the same IP address and MAC address. It also includes fault

tolerance and load balancing. Connect LAN1 and LAN2 to the same Ethernet switch.

Figure 62 Link Aggregation

Use this screen to set up port trunking. Click Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network

Interface, and then click Create.

Figure 63 Creating a Port Trunking

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Remove Click this to remove the port trunking.

Note: This button is available only when the port trunking is created.

Ta ble 40 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Interface (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

LAN1

LAN2

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

111

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

10.4.2.2 Configuring PPPoE Settings

Use this screen to configure PPPoE settings for a direct Internet connection. Select the ppp0

interface and then click Edit.

Figure 64 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Interface > PPPoE

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 41 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Interface > Create

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Automatically Select this option to have the interface get IP address info rmation autom a tically.

If no IP address information is assigned, the NAS uses Auto-IP to assign itself an IP

address and subnet mask. For example, you could connect the NAS directly t o your

computer. If the computer is also set to get an IP addres s au to matically, the computer

and the NAS will choose addresses for themselves and be able to com municate.

Manually Select this option for the interface to use fixed TCP/IP information. You must fill in the

following fields.

IP Address - Type an IP address in this field.

Subnet Mask - Type an IP subnet mask in this field.

Default Gateway - Type a default gateway address in this field.

Create Click this to save the settings and create a port trunking.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 42 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Interface > PPPoE

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable PPPoE to

directly connect

to the Internet

Select or clear this field to enable or disabl e PPPoE.

Username Enter the username exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form

user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components

exactly as given.

Password Enter t he password associated with the username above.

Show password Select this field to reveal the password hidden behind asterisks or clear this field to hide

the password.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

112

10.4.3 Configuring Web Configurator

Click Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Web Configurator to configure the port number of

HTTP and HTTPs.

Figure 65 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Web Configurator

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 42 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Interface > PPPoE (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 43 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Web Configurator

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Port Number Specify the port number of HTTP connection.

Note: The port number 8082 is reserved for media streaming.

Enable HTTPS

connection Select or clear this field to enable or disable HTTPS connection.

Port Number Specify the port number of HTTPS connection.

Allow only

HTTPS

connection

Select this field to allow connection to the Web Configurator via HTTPS only. Clear this

field to allow connection to the Web Configurator via both HTTP and HTTPS.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

113

10.4.4 Configuring Network Diagnosis

Click Control Panel > Network > TC P/IP > Network Diagnosis to test the network conn ection

to a particular IP address or domain name.

Figure 66 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Diagnosis

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

10.5 UPnP Port Mapping Screen

Use UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) port mapping to allow access from the WAN to services you

select on the NAS. It is recommended that you place the NAS behind an Internet gateway firewall

device to protect the NAS from attacks from the Internet. Many such Internet gateways use UPnP

to simplify peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. UPnP can automatically configure

the Internet gateway’s firewall and Network Address Translation (NAT) to allow access to the NAS

from the Internet.

Ta ble 44 Control Panel > Network > TCP/IP > Network Diagnosis

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Host Select a specific host to perform the diagnosis.

Ping Click this to test the network connection.

Result Displays whether or not the test received a response from the host.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

114

Figure 67 UPnP for FTP Access

In the above example, UPnP creates a firewall rule and NAT port forwarding mapping to send FTP

traffic (using TCP port number 21) from the public IP address a.b.c.d to the NAS’s private IP

address of 192.168.1.20.

Use the NAS’s UPnP Port Mapping screen to configure the UPnP settings your Internet gateway

uses to allow access from the WAN (Internet) to services you select on the NAS. You can also set

which port Internet users need to use in order to access a specific service on the NAS.

Note: To use UPnP port mapping, your Internet gateway must have U P nP enabled.

If your Internet gateway supports Port Address Translation (PAT is sometimes included with a port

forwarding feature), y ou can ha ve the Internet u sers use a different T C P port number f rom the one

the NAS uses for the service.

Figure 68 UPnP Port Address Translation for FTP Example

In the above example, the Internet gateway uses PAT to accept Internet user FTP sessions on port

2100, translate them to port 21, and forward them to the NAS.

10.5.1 UPnP and the NAS’s IP Address

It is recommended that the NAS use a static IP address (or a static DHCP IP address) if you will

allow access to the NAS from the Internet. The UPnP-created NAT mappings keep the IP address

the NAS had when you applied your settings in the UPnP Port Mapping screen. They do not

automatically update if the NAS’s IP address changes.

Note: WAN access stops working if the NAS’s IP address changes.

For example, if the NAS’s IP address was 192.168.1.33 when you applied the UPnP Port Mapping

screen’s settings and the NAS later gets a new IP address of 192.168.1.34 through DHCP, WAN

access stops working because the Internet gateway still tries to forward traffic to IP address

192.168.1.33. Since you can no longer access the NAS from the WAN, you would have to access

the NAS from the LAN and re-apply your UPnP Port Mapping screen settings to update the

Internet gateway’s UPnP port mappings.

TCP: 21

192.168.1.20

a.b.c.d

TCP: 2100

TCP: 21

192.168.1.20

a.b.c.d

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

115

Figure 69 UPnP Using the Wrong IP Address

10.5.2 UPnP and Security

UPnP’s automated nature makes it easier to use than manually configuring firewall and NAT rules,

but it is also less secure. Using UPnP may make your network more susceptible to snooping and

hacking attacks.

10.5.3 The NAS’s Services and UPnP

This section introduces the NAS’s services which an Internet gatew ay can use UPnP to allow access

to and from the Internet.

CIFS (Windows File Sharing)

Common Internet File System (CIFS) is a standard protocol supported by most operating systems

in order to share files across the network. Using UPnP port mapping for CIFS allows users to

connect from the Internet and use programs like Windows Explorer to access the NAS’s shares to

copy files from the NAS, delete files on the NAS, or upload files to the NAS from the Internet.

If you configure UPnP port mapping to allow CIFS access from the WAN but cannot get it to work,

you may also have to configure the Internet gatew ay to also allow NetBIOS traffic. See Section 16.3

on page 205 for more on CIFS.

FTP

File Transfer Protocol is a standard file transfer service used on the Internet. Using UPnP port

mapping for FTP allows remote users to use FTP from the Internet to access the NAS’s shares. A

user with read and write access to a share can copy files from the share, delete files from the share,

or upload files to the share. See Section 17.4 on page 215 for more on FTP. If you use UPnP to allow

FTP access from the WAN, you may w ant to use a different WAN port number (instead of the default

of port 21) to make it more secure. Remember to tell the remote users to use the custom port

number when using FTP to access the NAS.

HTTP (Web Configurator)

You can use UPnP port mapping to allow access to the NAS’ s management screens. If you use UPnP

to allow web configurator access f rom the W AN, you m ay w ant to use a different W AN port number

(instead of the default of port 80) to make it more secure. Remember to use the custom port

number when accessing the NAS’s web configurator from the Internet.

192.168.1.34

a.b.c.d

192.168.1.33

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

116

HTTP (Web Published Shares)

This is the NAS’s web publishing feature that lets people access files using a web browser without

having to log into the Web Configurator. Use UPnP port mapping to allow access to these files from

the Internet without having to enter a user name or password. See Section 17. 8 on page 230 for

more on web publishing.

10.5.4 UPnP Router

UPnP allows access to your NAS through a UPnP router. Click Network > UPnP Port Mapping >

UPnP Router to check if the NAS has found a UPnP router on the network.

Figure 70 Network > UPnP Port Mapping > UPnP Router

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

10.5.5 Configuring UPnP Port Mapping

Click Network > UPnP Port Mapping > UPnP Port Mapping to display the UPnP Port Mapping

screen.

Use this screen to set how the Internet gateway’s UPnP feature configure’s the Internet gateway’s

NAT IP address mapping and port mapping settings. These settings allow Internet users connected

to the Internet gateway’s WAN interface to access services on the NAS. You can set which port

Internet users need to use to access a specific service on the NAS.

Ta ble 45 Network > UPnP Port Mapping > UPnP Router

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status Displays whether a UPnP router is found.

IP address Displays the IP address of the UPnP router.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

117

Figure 71 Network > UPnP Port Mapping > UPnP Port Mapping

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 46 Network > UPnP Port Mapping > UPnP Port Mapping

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Click this to add a service and create a port mapping rule.

See more details on Section 10.5.5.1 on page 118.

Remove Click this to open the following screen where you can remove a port mapping rule.

Click Yes to remove the selected port mapping rule or No to close this screen.

Enabled/Disabled Use this to enable or disable a selected port mapping rule.

Status Di splays the statu s of the port mapping rule . A green circle indicates the port mapping rule

is enabled and you can access the service. A grey circle indicates the port mapping rule is

disabled. A red circle indicates the router’s settings failed to be changed. “-” indicates a

new mapping rule.

Service This read-only field identifies a service on the NAS.

LAN Port Displays the NAS’s internal port number for the service.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

118

10.5.5.1 Adding a Port Mapping Rule

Some Internet gateways will delete all UPnP mappings after reboot. So if the Internet gateway

reboots, you may need to re-apply th e UPnP port mapping again. Click UPnP Port Mapping > Add

to add NAS services and create port mapping rules.

Select the services you want to create port mapping rules for, and click Apply to add the services.

Click Cancel to close the screen without saving any setting.

WAN Port When you enable on e of th e NA S’s services, specify t he port n umber (1~6 5,535) Int ernet

uses need to use to connect to the Internet gateway’s WAN port in order to access the

service on the NAS. Whoever wants to access a service on the NAS from the Inte rnet must

use this port number.

Make sure there is not another service using TCP protocol with the same port number.

If another device is using the same port (the Internet gateway has the same port number

mapped to another LAN IP address), the NAS overwrites it when you apply the setting and

WAN users can no longer access the othe r device.

Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the NAS.

Reset Click Reset to begin configuring this screen afresh.

Ta ble 46 Network > UPnP Port Mapping > UPnP Port Mapping (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

119

Note: The default of the WAN port for the newly created service displays -1. Specify the

port number from 1 to 65,535, or you cannot access that service from the Internet.

10.6 Terminal Screen

Use this screen to enable or disable Telnet and SSH (Secure SHell) access to the NAS.

Telnet or SSH access lets you use line commands to configure the NAS. Use these commands at

your own risk. The vendor takes no responsibility for any changes you make using the commands.

Click Control Panel > Network > Terminal in the navigation pan el to open the following screen.

Figure 72 Control Panel > Network > Terminal

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

120

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

10.7 DyDNS Screen

Use this to enable and configure Dynamic DNS.

Dynamic DNS (DyDNS) allows you to update your curr ent dynamic IP address with a dynamic DNS

service so that anyone can contact you (such as through NetMeeting or CUSeeMe). You can also

access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance

myhost.dhs.org, where m yhost is a name of your choice) that will nev er change instead of using an

IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to

call you even if they don't know your IP address.

Click Control Panel > Network > DyDNS to open the following screen.

Ta ble 47 Control Panel > Network > Terminal

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Telnet

Service Select this to enabl e Telnet access to the NAS. Clear it to not allow Telnet access to the

NAS.

To use Telnet, log in as “admin” or “root” an d use the admin password.

Enable SSH

Service Select this to enable SSH access to the NAS. Clear it to not allow SSH access to the NAS.

To use SSH, log in as “admin” or “root” and use the admin password.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore previously saved settings.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

121

Figure 73 Control Panel > Network > DyDNS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 48 Control Panel > Network > DyDNS

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable DyDNS Select this to use dynamic DNS.

You need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with a service provider such as

www.dyndns.org. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.

Service Provider Select your Dynamic DNS service provider.

Hostname Enter your host name provided by the Dynamic DNS service.

Username Enter your user name for your DNS account.

Password Enter the password assigned to your DNS account.

Status This shows the DyDNS update resu lt:

Disabled – You have manually disabled the DyDNS feature.

Error – An unrecover able error (such as authentication error) occurred caused the NAS

to disable the DyDNS feature automatically.

Fail to update – A recoverable error (such as a temporary Internet disconnect)

occurred. The NAS will retry later.

Updated - The NAS updated the DyDNS server with the NAS’s public IP address.

Default Gateway This shows with which public IP of interface the NAS updated the DyDNS server.

External Address This shows the IP address of the NAS that can be accessed in th e Wide Area Network

(WAN). Note that this is not assigned by the DyDNS server.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to clear the fields.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

122

10.8 FW Upgrade Screen

Use this screen to upgrade the NA S firmware. You should first have downloaded the latest firmware

files from the ZyXEL website.

Do not turn off the NAS while it is upgrading the firmware or you may

render it unusable.

Click Control Panel > System > FW Upgrade to open the following screen. Latest Firmware

Check allows you to check the latest firmware version and perform the upgrade.

Figure 74 Control Panel > System > FW Upgrade > Latest Firmware Check

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 49 Control Panel > System > FW Upgrade > Latest Firmware Check

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Model Name Displays the model name of you NAS

Current Firmware

Version Displays the current firmware version of your NAS

Last Check Dis plays the last checking ti me. If no, it is blank.

Check Now Click this to check ZyXEL’s server for updated firmware.

Periodically Check for

Latest Firmware

Automatically

Select this to have the NAS regularly check ZyXEL’s serv er for updated firmw are. The

NAS notifies you at login if a new firmware is available.

Click Apply to save this field’s setting.

Status Displays the firmware checking status or error messages. If there is no previous

checking information, it displays --.

Chapter 10 Control Panel

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

123

You can also download the firmware from the ZyXEL website and upgrade the firmware manually.

Click Control Panel > System > Manual Firmware Upgrade to show the following screen.

Figure 75 Control Panel > S ystem > FW Upgrade > Manual Firmware Upgrade

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Upgrade Now Click this to upload the new firmware. The NAS automatically restarts after you

upgrade. Wait until the restart completes before accessing the NAS again. If you

interrupt the upgrade, then the NAS may become unusable. See page 354 for your

model’s LED behavior during firmware upgrade.

Reset Click this to refresh the screen.

Ta ble 50 Control Panel > System> Firmware > Manual Firmware Upgrade

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Browse Click this to find the file on your computer.

Note: You cannot choose a downgraded firmware. If you do, the screen will show: The

NAS firmware cannot be downgraded, please select a newer version of binary

(BIN) upgrade file from your computer.

Upgrade Click this to upgrade the firmware after you find the file.

Ta ble 49 Control Panel > System > FW Upgrade > Latest Firmware Check (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

124

CHAPTER 11

Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

11.1 Overview

This chapter introduces the File Browser, Photo, Music, Video, Media Server and the iTunes

Server for sharing media files.

11.2 File Browser

Click File Browser on the Desktop to open the following screen in a new tab . Use the file browsing

screens to play, open, upload, and download files. A share is a set of user access permissions for a

specific folder on a volume (gives someone access to a folder). It is equivalent to the Windows

concept of a shared folder, but the access rights are independent of the folder (you configure the

share and the folder separately). You can map a share to a network drive for easy and familiar file

transfer for Windows users.

• A folder icon with a hand indicates a share.

• The administrator owns and manages the public shares.

• Double-click a media file to open it. Double-click other types of files to be able to save them.

• Click to the right of a file or folder name to select it.

• Use the [SHIFT] key to select a range of entries. Hold down the [CTRL] key to select multiple

individual entries.

• Drag and drop files to open a screen that lets you choose whether to copy or move them.

• You can upload files of up to 2 GB in size.

• Y o u can download individual files of up to 4 GB in size with Mozilla Firefox and Internet Explorer 7

and later or up to 2 GB in size with Internet Explorer 6.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

125

Figure 76 File Browser

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 51 File Browser

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Up Click this t o go to the next higher layer in the share’s folder tree.

Name This column identifies the names of folders and files in the share. Click a file’s file name to

open the file or save it to your computer. Click a folder’s name to dis play the folder’ s conte nts.

Size This column displays a file’s size in bytes.

Last Modified This column displays the last time the file or folder was changed (in year-month-day

hour:minute:second format).

Create New

Folder Click this to open the following screen where you can create a new folder within the share.

Specify a name to identify the fol d er. See Section 11.2.2 on page 128 for more information

on folder names. Click Apply to create a folder or click Cancel to exit this screen.

Configure

Share Select a share and click this link to open a screen where you can see and con figure share

management details.

Delete Select a file or folder and click this to delete it from the NAS.

Rename Select a file or folder and click this to change its name.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

126

11.2.1 Configure Share Screen

In the File Browser screen, select a share and click Configure Share to open the following screen

where you can see and configure share management details.

Upload Click this to open the following screen where you can add files to the sh are.

Use the Browse button to locate your file/s and click Apply to upload the file. Click Cancel to

close this screen.

Note: Do not refresh the screen while an upload is going on.

Download Select a file and click this to save the file to your computer.

Note: Do not refresh the screen while a download is going on.

Compress Select files or folders and click this to compress them into a zip file.

Decompress Select a zipped file and click this to create a folder named after the zip file and save the

decompressed files into the folder.

Restore When you are i n a recycle bin folder, select a folder or file and click this to restore it.

Refresh Click this to update the information displayed in the screen.

Note: Do not refresh the screen while an upload or download is in progress.

Ta ble 51 File Browser (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

127

Figure 77 File Browser > Configure Share

The following table describes the labels in the this screen.

Ta ble 52 File Browser > Configure Share

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Share Name Configure a name to identify this shar e. Type a share name from 1 to 239 single-byte (no

Chinese characters allowed for example) ASCII characters. The name cannot be the

same as another existing local share. See Section 11.2.2 on page 128 for more

information on share names. This is not configurable for the NAS’s default admin, music,

photo, public, and video shares.

Volume This shows the volume the share is on. It is read-only.

Make this share

owned by Select the administrator or user account that is to own (manage) this share. The share

owner controls access rights to the share. This is not configurable for the NAS’s default

admin and public shares.

Enable This Share Select this option to allow users to access this share. When this option is not selected,

you cannot see and access this share.

Enable Recycle Bin Select this option to keep deleted items in a recycle bin. When you delete an item, a

recycle folder is created within the share, and the deleted item is stored in the recycle

bin. Later if y ou w ant to retrieve a deleted item, you can select the item from the recycle

folder and move/copy the item to another share.

Publish this share

to Media Server Select this option to make the share’s files available to media clients. When you publish a

share, you can also select whether or not to publish music tracks, photos, and videos.

Publish this share

to Web Select this option to let people use a web browser to access this share’s files without

logging into the Web Configurator screens.

Share Access Select who can access the files in the share and how much access they are to be given. If

you publish the share to the media server or the web, all users will have at least read-

only access to the share, regardless of what you configure he re.

Select Keep it p rivate to owner to allow only the share owner to read files in the share,

delete files in the share and save files to the share.

Select Make it public to allow anyone (with or without a user account on the NAS) to

read files in the share, delete files in the share and save files to the share.

Select Advanced to select which individual users can read the share’s files, which users

can delete the share’s files, and which users are blocked from doing either.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous s creen without saving.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

128

11.2.2 Share and Folder Names

The name can only contain the following characters:

• Alphanumeric (A-z, 0-9) and Unicode.

The NAS allows FTP access to shares, folders or files with names encoded in the UTF-8 (8-bit

UCS/Unicode Transformation Format) format. So your FTP client must support UTF-8 in order to

access shares, folders or files on the NAS with Unicode names.

•Spaces

• _ [underscores]

•. [periods]

•- [dashes]

Other limitations include:

• All leading and trailing spaces are removed automatically.

• Multiple spaces within names are converted to a single space.

• Share names must be unique (they cannot be the same as other share names).

• The NAS creates automatic volume names for external (USB) disk volumes. These are a type of

share, so the share name you configure cannot conflict with the external (USB) disk volume

names. “ExtVol1” or “ExtVol2” are examples of external (USB) disk volume names.

• Folder names must be unique (they cannot be the same as other folder names).

• The minimum character length of a name is one character, that is a name cannot be blank.

• The maximum character length of share name is 239 characters.

• Unicode is supported for share names, although your FTP client must support UT F-8. Full support

should be available in all Windows versions after Windows 2000.

11.3 Photo

Click the Photo icon on the Desktop to open the photo folder in a new tab . Double-click the photo

folder to view photos in the shares that publish photos. The following figures show the files as

thumbnail and list views of files.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

129

Figure 78 Photo (Thumbnail)

Figure 79 Photo (List)

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

130

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

11.3.1 Exif and Google Maps (Photos)

Double-click a photo file to display it. Thumbnails of all photos in the view display across the bottom

of the screen. Click a photo’s EXIF button to display or hide the photo’s Exchangeable image file

format (Exif) data.

Ta ble 53 Photo Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION

ZyXEL The path of the current view.

Click an underlined link to go to that location in the path.

Music, Photo, or Video indicates the category of files.

Search Use this to look for a file by name.

A View files. Double-click an item to play it. Y ou can also select check boxes for multiple items

when you display the files as a list.

B The current page and total number of pages displays when a category has multiple pages of

entries. Click an arrow or type a number to go to another page of entries.

C Select a view type for displaying folders and files:

Date - Sort photos by date.

All - Display all of the category’s files.

Folder - List the folders contai ning files.

Thumbnail Click this to view the files as thumbnails.

List Click this to view the files as a list.

Slideshow Click this to display files as a slideshow.

Refresh Click this to update the display in the screen.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

131

Figure 80 Exif Information

If a photo’s Exif data includes GPS location data, click the latitude or longitude link to display the

location in Google Maps. Click Clear to delete the markers of other photos and only display the

current photo’s marker.

Figure 81 Google Maps

11.3.2 Slideshow (Photos)

In a Photo menu click the SlideShow button to display the menu’ s files as a slideshow . Move you r

cursor over the slideshow’s screen to display full screen, previous, pause, and next buttons for

controlling the slideshow.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

132

Note: Your browser must have the Flash Player plug-in installed to view slideshows.

Figure 82 Slideshow

11.4 Music

Click the Music icon on the Desktop to open the music folder in a new tab. Double-click the music

folder to view and play music files in the shares that publish photos. The following figures show

thumbnail and list views of files.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

133

Figure 83 Music (Thumbnail)

Figure 84 Music (List)

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

134

This table describes common labels in the Playzone media server screens. Not every item displays

in every screen.

11.4.1 Now Playing (Music)

A Now Playing link displays when a song is playing. Click it to display a panel like the following.

This screen displays the name of the current song and it’s play progress and lets you control the

playback.

Figure 85 Now Playing

11.5 Video

Click the Video icon on the Desktop to open the video folder in a new tab. Double-click the video

folder to view and play video files in the shares that publish videos. The following figures show the

thumbnail and list views of files.

Ta ble 54 Music Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION

ZyXEL The path of the current view.

Click an underlined link to go to that location in the path.

Music, Photo, or Video indicates the category of files.

Search Use this to look for a file by name.

A View files. Double-click an item to play it. Y ou can also select check boxes for multiple items

when you display the files as a list.

B The current page and total number of pages displays when a category has multiple pages of

entries. Click an arrow or type a number to go to another page of entries.

C Select a view type for displaying folders and files:

Artist - Sort music by artist.

All - Display all of the category’s files.

Folder - List the folders containing music fil es.

Current Playlist - Show the playing and queued songs.

Thumbnail Click this to view the files as thumbnails.

List Click this to view the files as a list.

Play Click this to play the currently selected file. You can also double-click a file to play it.

Add to Current

Playlist Click this to add the selected music file to the currently playing playlist.

Refresh Click this to update the display in the screen.

Now Playing This link is available when a song is playing. Click it to see details about the song that is

currently playing.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

135

Figure 86 Video (Thumbnail)

Figure 87 Video (List)

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

136

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

11.6 Playzone Settings

The Playzone Settings screen is only available with user accounts. Click Playzone Settings to

open the following screen. Use this screen to change general Pla yzone screen settings and account

passwords.

Figure 88 Playzone Settings

Ta ble 55 Video Screen

LABEL DESCRIPTION

ZyXEL The path of the current view.

Click an underlined link to go to that location in the path.

Music, Photo, or Video indicates the category of files.

Search Use this to look for a file by name.

A View files. Double-click an item to play it. Y ou can also select check boxes for multiple items

when you display the files as a list.

B The current page and total number of pages displays when a category has multiple pages of

entries. Click an arrow or type a number to go to another page of entries.

C Select a view type for displaying folders and files:

All - Display all of the category’s files.

Folder - List the folders containing music fil es.

Thumbnail Click this to view the files as thumbnails.

List Click this to view the files as a list.

Play Click this to play the currently selected file. You can also double-click a file to play it.

Refresh Click this to update the display in the screen.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

137

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 56 Playzone Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

WMP This field displays “Inst all ed” if you already have Windows Media Player installed or a

link for installing it if you do not already have it installed.

Double Click Behavior

Setting Select Replace current playlist and start to play to have double click ing a song

cause the NAS to immediately stop any currently playing song and start playing the

double-clicked song.

Select Append to current playlist to have double clicking a song add a song to the

end of the current playlist.

Slide Effect Enable the Ken Burns effect to have the NAS automatically pan and zoom photos in

slideshows. Disable it to display photos in slideshows normally.

Slide Interval Select how long to display each image in a slideshow before changing to the next.

Video Playback Select Play Next to play the rest of the video files in a folder. So for example, a folder

has video files 1~10 and you play video 3. When video 3 finish es the device contin ues

playing the rest of the videos in the folder (4~10). It does not loop back and play

videos 1 and 2.

Account Name Type the user name of the account for which you want to change the password.

Old Password Type the user’s current password.

New Password Create a new password for the user. You can type from one to 14 single-byte (no

Chinese characters allowed for example) ASCII characters.

Password (Confirm) You must type the exact same password that you just typed in the above field.

Language Select the web configurator language from the drop-down list box.

Go to system

administration page This link appears when you are logged in as the administrator. Click it to open the

advanced administrator screens. The NAS opens the administrator configuration

screens in a new browser if you click Go to system administration page while

using the media server to play music.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to refresh the screen.

Cancel Click this to exit the screen witho ut saving your changes.

Chapter 11 Videos, Photos, Music, & File Browser

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

138

11.7 Application Zone

Normal users can click Application Zone to go to the management page of installed, non-built-in

packages.

Figure 89 Application Zone

The following table describes the labels in the this screen.

11.8 Media Server

Use the Media Server screens to enable or disable the sharing of media files with media clients

and select which shares to share. See Section 17.5 on page 216 for details.

11.9 iTunes Server

Use the iTunes server to share media files with iTunes users on your network. See Section 17.6 on

page 218 for details.

Ta ble 57 Application Zone

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name This is the name of the application.

Version This is the version number of the item.

Descripti on This is a brief description of the application.

Management

Page Click this link to go the application’s management page where you can configure settings for

it.

Refresh Update the list of applications in the screen.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

139

CHAPTER 12

Administrator

12.1 Overview

This chapter describes how to access the administrator screens and provides an overview of its

screens.

12.2 Administrator Screens

The Desktop screen displays an Administrator icon when you log in with an administrator

account. Click it to open the administrator configuration screens in a new tab. The Status screen

displays first. See Chapter 15 on page 203 for more information about the Status screen.

Figure 90 Status

Chapter 12 Administrator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

140

12.2.1 Global Administrator Icons

The icons and language label at the top-right of the screen (1) are visible from most of the

administrator screens. The following table describes the ‘global’ icons and labels.

12.2.2 Navigation Panel

The navigation panel on the left of the Web Configurator screen (2) contains screen links. Click a

link to display sub-links. There are no sub-links for the Status screen. Certain screens also contain

hyper links that allow you to jump to another screen.

The following table describes the navigation panel screens.

Ta ble 58 Global Labels and Icons

LABEL/ICON DESCRIPTION

Language Select the web configurator language from the drop-down list box.

Help Click this to open Web Help for the current screen.

Home Click this to go to the Desktop screen.

Ta ble 59 Screens Summary

LINK SCREEN FUNCTION

Status This screen shows system information, the stat us of the volumes, and the

users who are currently using the NAS.

System

Setting Packages The NA S can download multiple packages /files at once and automatically goes

through all the installation steps.

Server Name Specify the NAS’s server name and workgroup name.

Date / Time Chose a time zone and/or allow the NAS to synchronize with a time server.

Chapter 12 Administrator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

141

Applications FTP Server Enable FTP file transfer to/from the NAS, set the number of FTP connections

allowed, an FTP idle timeout, and the character set.

Media Server Enable or disable the sharing of media files and select which shares to share.

iTunes Server Use the iTunes server to share media files with iTunes users on your network.

Download

Service Have the NAS handle large file downloads.

Web

Publishing Let people use a web browser to access files in shares without logging into the

Web Configurator.

Print Server View and manage the NAS’s list of printers and print jobs.

Copy/Sync

Button Copy or synchronize files between a USB device and the NAS.

Auto Up load -

Flickr/YouTube Upload files in select ed shares to your Flickr and/or YouTube accounts.

Auto Up load -

FTP Uploadr Up load files in selected shares to FTP servers.

Dropbox Use your Dropbox account to easily move files to your NAS and have the NA S

download *.torrent files.

Time Machine Use Time Machine in OS X to use your NAS as a backup volume.

Memopal Back up files from the NAS to your Memopal account.

GoogleDriveCli

ent Use GoogleDriveClient to synchronize local user folders on the NAS with

Google Drive cloud storage accounts.

Syslog Server Enable the syslog server and select the categories to include in the log report.

TFTP Server Configure the NAS to accept log files from TFTP clients.

pyLoad Configure the NAS to use pyLoad to manage your downloads, including those

from one-click hosting sites.

Sharing Users View, create and edit administrator and user accounts to let people use the

NAS.

Groups View, create and edit groups. Groups allow you to organize users into specific

groups. You can create shares accessible only by the group members.

Shares View , create and edit shares. Shares ar e shared folder s to which you can allow

specific users read/write access rights.

WebDAV Allow remote users to use client programs that support WebDAV to edit and

manage files stored on the NAS

Maintenance Power Configure power saving settings for the NAS and have the NAS turn itself off

and on or reboot according to the schedules you configure.

Log View the NAS’s logs and configure how you want to receive the log reports.

Configuration Back up and/or restore the NAS configuration file.

SSL Configure HTTPS and the NAS’s SSL certificate.

Shutdown Restart the NAS or shut it down.

Unpair

myZyXELcloud Remove the pairing between the NAS and the myZyXELcloud account.

Protect Backup Create and customize backup jobs.

Restore Restore previous backups made with the NAS.

Network NFS Install the NFS package to display this screen where you can configure NFS

(Network File System) file-sharing.

Ta ble 59 Screens Summary (continued)

LINK SCREEN FUNCTION

Chapter 12 Administrator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

142

12.2.3 Main Window

The main window (3) shows the screen you select in the navigation panel. It is discussed in the

rest of this document.

12.2.4 Status Messages

The Message text box at the bottom of the screen (4) displays status messages as you configure

the NAS.

12.2.5 Common Administrator Screen Icons

The following table explains some icons that appear in several administrator configuration screens.

12.2.6 Session Example (Windows)

Open Windows Explorer and type two back slashes followed by the NAS name or IP address.

Initially you can only read and write to the Public, Video, Music, and Photo folders until you

create other shares on the NAS. This session is then displayed as shown in the following figure.

Ta ble 60 Common Administrator Screen Icons

ICON DESCRIPTION

Edit

Click this to go to a screen where you can change the configuration settings of an entry.

Delete

Click this to delete an entry from the list.

Edit

Click this to jump to related item’s configuration screen.

Refresh

Click this to refresh the data for the field or value with which it is associated.

User

See the chapter on user accoun ts for detailed information on variants of this icon.

See the chapter on shares for detailed information on variants of this icon.

Healthy

This represents a healthy volume.

Down

This represents a down volume.

Scan Disk

Click this to scan a hard disk for file system errors.

Note: It is recommended to scan the volume every three months or 32 reboots.

Eject

Click this before you remove an external hard drive so that you do not lose data that is being

transferred to or from that hard drive.

Chapter 12 Administrator

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

143

Session Exa mple (Windo ws)

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

144

CHAPTER 13

Managing Packages

13.1 About Packages

Packages enhance the functions of your NAS. Your NAS supports various packages that let you do

more. Your NAS comes with some packages pre-installed. The Packages screen also includes a list

of packages to add.

Note: Check what packages do before you install them. Only install packages you actually

plan to use.

Note: Get support for each package through its individual v endor.

13.2 Managing Packages

In the administrator screens, click System Setting > Packages to install, remove, or upgrade

packages. See Section 16.4 on page 207 for details.

Figure 91 System Setting > Packages

Chapter 13 Managing Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

145

13.3 Available Packages

Use packages to add the following applications to the NAS.

•Use the NFS screen (Section 18.3 on page 247) to configure the Network File System (NFS)

settings of your NAS.

•Use the TFTP Server screen (Section 18.4 on page 250) to configure the NAS to accept log files

from TFTP clients.

•Use the pyLoad screen (Section 18.5 on page 251) to use pyLoad manage your downloads

including those from one-click hosting sites.

•Use ownCloud (Section 18.6 on page 251) to store, synchronize, and share files, photos,

calendars, and more with computers and mobile devices using an ownCloud client.

•Use Memopal (Section 18.3 on page 247) to back up files on the NAS to your Memopal online

backup and storage account.

•Use the GoogleDriveClient screens (Section 18.8 on page 256) to synchronize local NAS shares

or folders and Google Drive accounts.

Access the following applications’ configuration screens through the Package Management

screen. Refer to the applications’ own documentation for further information.

•Gallery - This web-based application allows your NAS to host pictures. Y ou can upload images in

your local computer or shares to this application. Use the Gallery administrator account (default

username admin, password 1234) to log into the Gallery console. There you can create accounts

for other users.

•Use Logitech® Media Server (Section 17.5.2 on page 218) to manage a Logitech Squeezebox

device connected to the NAS.

•The NZBGet news grabber helps download files from UseNet.

•PHP-MySQL-phpMyAdmin can be used to manage MySQL through the web . E nter 'root' as the

username and '1234' as the password to log in. This includes MySQL, PHP, and phpMyAdmin.

•Transmission - This Bit Torrent client supports adding tasks through torrent files and magnet

links.

•WordPress - This allows you to create and manage a blog. Use the WordPress administrator

account (default username admin, password 1234) to log in. You can then create accounts for

other users.

•myZyXELcloud-Agent - Use this to go to mycloud.zyxel.com to set up a free DDNS hostname

for the NAS so you can connect to it easily from the Internet.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

146

CHAPTER 14

Tutorials

14.1 Overview

This chapter provides tutorials that show how to use the NAS.

•Windows 7 Network, see page 146

•Windows 7 Network Map, see page 150

•Playing Media Files in Windows 7, see page 152

•Windows 7 Devices and Printers, see page 152

•File Sharing Tutorials, see page 155

•Download Service Tutorial, see page 162

•Copy and Flickr Auto Upload Tutorial, see page 173

•FTP Uploadr Tutorial, see page 174

•Web Configurator’s Security Sessions, see page 177

•Using FTPES to Connect to the NAS, see page 188

•Using a Mac to Access the NAS, see page 189

•How to Use the BackupPlanner, see page 191

14.2 Windows 7 Network

To see your NAS in a Windows 7 home or work network:

1Click Start > Control Panel. Set View by to Category and click Network and Internet.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

147

2Click View network computers and devices.

3The NAS icon displays twice because the NAS is both a media server and a storage device. Double-

click either NAS icon to open the Web Configurator login screen.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

148

14.2.1 If the NAS Icon Does Not Display

The network containing the NAS must be set as a h ome or work network in order for the NAS icons

to display. If the network containing the NAS displays as “Public”:

1Click Network and Sharing Center and then the network’s link (circled in the figure).

2Use the Set Network Location screen to set the network’s location to home or work.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

149

14.2.2 NAS Icon Right-click Options

Right-click the NAS’s icon to see these options:

•Install/Uninstall: Click Install to add the NAS as a device in your computer. After you install

the NAS you can see it in the computer’s list of devices (see Section 14.5 on page 152. Click

Uninstall to remove the NAS from the list of devices installed in your computer.

•View device web page opens the Web Configurator login screen.

•Open Media Player opens the computer’s default media player.

•Create shortcut adds a desktop shortcut to the Web Configurator login screen.

•Properties opens a window of NAS details and troubleshooting information.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

150

•Manufacturer identifies the company that produce d th e N A S.

•Model identifies the NAS model.

•Model number identifies the NAS model number.

•Device webpage shows the IP address for accessing the Web Configurator.

•Serial number is unavailable because the NAS does not have one.

•MAC address is the NAS’s unique physical hardware address (MAC). You need the MAC

address to register the product at myZyXEL.com. Customer support may also request it for

troubleshooting purposes.

•Unique identifier is a unique UPnP ID that the NAS generated.

•IP address is the NAS’s IP address. It is also the IP address for accessing the Web

Configurator.

14.3 Windows 7 Network Map

To see your NAS in a Windows 7 home or work network map:

1Click Start > Control Panel > View network status and tasks (or Network and Sharing

Center if you view the Control Panel by icons).

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

151

2Click See full map (1 in the figure).

The network containing the NAS must be set as a home or work network in order to use the full

map feature. If the network containing the NAS displays as “Public”, click the network’s link (2 in

the figure, although it is already set to home here) and use the Set Network Location screen to

set the network’s location to home or work (see page 148).

3Double-click the NAS’ s icon to open the W eb Configurator login screen. See Section 14.2.2 on page

149 for the NAS icon’s right-click options.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

152

14.4 Playing Media Files in Windows 7

In Windows 7, the NAS automatically displays as a library in Windows Media Player.

Figure 92 NAS in Windows Media Player

14.5 Windows 7 Devices and Printers

After you use the NAS’ s network icon’s install option you can manage the NAS from the Windows 7

Devices and Printers folder.

Click Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Select the NAS

icon to display information about the NAS. Double-click the NAS icon to open a properties window

(see page 149). Right-click the icon to display these options:

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

153

•Open Media Player opens the computer’s default media player.

•Create shortcut has Windows make a desktop shortcut to this screen.

•Troubleshoot opens Windows’ device troubleshooting wizard.

•Remove device removes the NAS from the Windows 7 Devices and Printers folder.

•Properties opens a window of NAS details and troubleshooting information (see page 149).

14.5.1 Windows 7 Desktop Shortcut

This is the NAS’s desktop shortcut. Double-click it to open a properties window (see page 149).

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

154

1Right-click the NAS’s desktop shortcut icon to see these options:

•Open Media Player opens the computer’s default media player.

•Open file location takes you to the Windows 7 Devices and Printers folder.

•Download NAS Starter Utility downloads the NAS’s Starter Utility. It lets you find, set up , and

manage the NAS as well as copy files to it and access the files on it. See Chapter 2 on page 19 for

details.

•Restore previous versions is the Windows 7 option for restoring a file or folder. It does not

apply to this shortcut.

•Send to give you options for copying the shortcut to another location.

•Cut removes this shortcut so you can paste it somewhere else.

•Copy copies the shortcut so you can paste it somewhere else.

•Create shortcut has Windows make a desktop shortcut to this icon.

•Delete sends the shortcut to the recycle bin.

•Rename lets you change the name of the shortcut.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

155

•Troubleshoot opens Windows’ device troubleshooting wizard.

•Remove device removes the NAS from the Windows 7 Devices and Printers folder.

•Properties opens a window of details about the shortcut.

14.6 File Sharing Tutorials

The following sections cover using the NAS for file sharing. This chapter assumes you h ave already

followed the Quick Start Guide instructions to perform initial setup and configuration (so you have a

working volume). See the rest of this User’s Guide for details on configuring the NAS’s various

screens.

14.6.1 Creating a User Account

Jimmy wants to create accounts for his sons Bob and Kevin. This is how he would do it.

1Go to the advanced administration screens.

2 Click Sharing > Users to open the Users screen. Then click Add User.

3Configure the screen as follows and write down the username and password to give to Bob. If the

username and password are the same as Bob’s Windows login, Bob will not need to enter a

username and password when he logs into his share from his computer. Set the Account Type to

User so Bob doesn’t get to configure the whole NAS. Click Apply to create the account.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

156

4The account now displays in the Users screen.

Now that Jimmy has created Bob’s account, he can go through the steps again to create another

account for Kevin. After both accounts are created, he can go to Section 14.6.2 on page 156 to

create shares for Bob and Kevin.

14.6.2 Creating a Share

Suppose Jimmy has already created separate accounts for his sons Bob and Kevin. Now Jimmy

wants to create a share fo r each son. He also w ants to make sur e that each son can only access his

own share (to keep them from deleting each other’s files). This is how he would do it.

1In the NAS’ s administration web configur ator screens, click Shares > Add Share. Click Add Share

to create a new share.

2Specify a name for the share and select which volume it should be on. Configure the screen as

follows. Then click Edit.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

157

3Configure the screen as follows to give Bob full access right to the share. Then click Apply to create

the share.

Now that Jimmy has created Bob’s share, he can go through the steps again to create another

share for Kevin.

14.6.3 Creating a Group

After creating user accounts for Bob and Kevin, Jimmy wants to create a group for his sons and

another one for the parents. Jimmy can assign access rights to his sons’ group for certain shares

such as a cartoons share and allow only the parents’ group to access the scary movie share. This is

how he would create the group.

1In the NAS’ s administration web configurator screen, click Groups > Add Group.

2Specify a name for the group. Select the user(s) you want to add to the group from the Available

User(s) list and click Add Selected User(s). Configure the screen as follows. Then click Apply to

create the group.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

158

Now that Jimmy has created a group for Bob and Kevin, he can go through the steps again to

create another group for the parents. Then he can see the rest of the tutorials for how to use the

groups in assigning access rights to shares.

14.6.4 Accessing a Share From Windows Explorer

If you map a NAS share (where data is stored) to a Windows network drive, you can use Windows

Explorer to transfer files to and from the NAS as if it was another folder on your computer. Here he

maps Jimmy’s share to Jimmy’s computer.

1Start Windows Explorer and go to the NAS’s server name. The default is ‘nas’ followed by the

number of your model (‘nas540’ for example).

2Click Tools > Map Network Drive.

3Select the network drive that you want to map the NAS to from the Drive list box. This example

uses I. Then browse to and select the share on the NAS. Click Finish.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

159

4Enter the username and password for Jimmy’s account and click OK. You do not need to do this if

the username and password are the same as Jimmy’s Windows login.

5After the mapping is done, you can then simply copy and paste or dr ag and drop files from/to y our

local computer’s drives to or from this network fold er. Just like the NAS’s share was another folder

on your computer.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

160

Now that Bob has mapped Jimmy’s share to Jimmy’s computer, he can go through the steps again

to map K e vin’s share to Kevin’s computer.

14.6.5 Accessing a Share Using FTP

You can also use FTP to access the NAS. Suppose Jimmy is temporarily using a different computer

and wants to access his share without mapping it to the computer. This is how he would do it.

1Open the FTP client (Windows Explorer is used here) and type “ftp://username@server” where

“username” is the account’s username and “server” is the NAS’s IP address or server name.

2Enter your password and click Login.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

161

3Now you can access files and copy files from/to your local computer’ s drives to or from this network

folder.

14.6.6 Accessing a Share Through the Web Configurator

You can browse and access files through the web configurator.

1Log into the NAS web configurator (see Section 7.2 on page 38) using the appropriate user name

and password (this example uses Jimmy’s) and click File Browser. Click a share (the admin share

in this example) to see the top level of the share’s contents.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

162

2Click a folder’s file name to browse the folder. You can open files or copy them to your computer.

You can also create new folders and upload additional files to the share.

3Click the logout icon when your are done.

14.7 Download Service Tutorial

This tutorial covers using the NAS to download a file from the Internet. Use this same procedure for

P2P downloads as well as regular HTTP (web) and FTP downloads. See Section 17.11.2 on page 235

for more on the download service.

14.7.1 Copying/Pasting a Download Link

1Open your Internet browser (this example uses Internet Explorer).

2Find a download link for the file you want. In this example, www .zyx el.com has a Serv er 1 link for

downloading a datasheet for ZyXEL’s NSA325 v2.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

163

Note: Mak e sure the link opens either the file y ou want or a pop-up window about how to

handle the file.

Note: It is also OK for the link to open a .torrent file. If you are redirected to a screen that

says the download should star t in a few seconds, there may be a link to c lic k if the

download does not start automatically. See if that link opens the file or the pop-up

window.

3Right-click the download link and select Copy Shortcut in Internet Explorer (or Copy Link

Location in Firefox).

4Log into the NAS web configurator (see Section 7.2 on page 38) using the administrator account

and click Application Zone and the Application Zone > Download Service link.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

164

5Click Add.

6Right-click the URL field and select Paste.

7The URL displays in the URL field. Click Apply.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

165

8After a few moments, the download task appears in the Download Service screen’s Active tab.

The download appears in the Completed tab when it is done. By default the NAS stores all

downloads in the admin share’s download folder. See Section 14.6.4 on page 158, Section 14.6.5

on page 160, or Section 14.6.6 on page 161 for how to access a share.

14.7.2 Configuring the Download Service Preferences

Once you added a list of download tasks to the NAS (see Section 14.7.1 on page 162), you can

have the NAS download files during a specific time period of the day. Y ou can also configure the P2P

download settings to control bandwidth and optimize download efficiency.

Say you have the NAS turned on all the time, but you only want the NAS download files at night.

Here is how you use the download period control feature to set the time range.

1Click Applications > Download Service > Preferences to open the General Settings screen.

2Select Enable Download Period Control and use the arrows to adjust the time period from 23:30

to 09:00. Cli ck Apply to save your changes. The NAS only downloads files within this 9.5-hour

period every day.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

166

Note: If you configure the Power On/Off Schedule feature in the Power Management

screen, mak e sure your activ e download period does not conflict with t he power-off

period.

Note: If power failure occurs during the active download pe riod, the NAS wi ll veri fy

whether the downloaded files were damaged. If a file is corrupted, the NAS will

download the file again. If the file is intact but not compl etely downloaded, the NAS

will resume the download task after it restarts.

3When it is not the download time, you see a message in the Download Service screen, indicating

the active download period.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

167

Click Applications > Download S e rvic e > Preferences > P2P download to open the following

screen. Enter the information below and then click Apply.

Here is a list of P2P download settings you want to configure for your NAS:

• Limit the maximum upload rate to 20 KB/s.

Enter this value in the Max. upload rate field.

• Actively download three torrent files but only upload one at a time.

Enter 3 in the Maximum Number of Active Torrents field and enter 1 in the Maximum

Number of Seeding Jobs field.

• Keep sharing until the NAS has shared equal or greater amount of the downloaded files.

Select the check box and enter 100 in the Upload/Download Ratio field.

• Scroll down and click Edit IP Filter. Use an online IP filter table from http://www .bluetack.co.uk/

config/level1.gz for example to protect P2P downloads.

Enter the URL in the Update IP Filter from the Internet Every Week field.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

168

14.7.3 Using Download Service Notification

Use an RSS feed reader on your computer to keep track of files the NAS has downloaded. The

following examples show how to subscribe to the NAS’s download service notifications. See Section

17.11.3 on page 236 for more on download service notifications.

Some RSS readers may not support the NAS’s download service notifications. For example, Google

Reader cannot support this feature if the NAS has a private IP address.

Note: It is recommended to subscribe to the download service notifications using the

built-in reader in Internet Explorer 7 or higher, or Firefox.

You have to activate this feature in the Download Service screen. Click Applications >

Download Service to open the following screen. Select Enable Download Notify and click

Apply.

Internet Explorer 7 Example

1After you activate download service notification, click the RSS feed icon.

2The following screen displays. Select Subscribe to this feed.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

169

3The following screen displays. Click Subscribe.

4Click the Favorite icon on your browser and select the Feeds tab to check the updates of your

NAS’s download list.

Firefox Example

1After you activate download service notification, click the RSS feed icon.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

170

2The following screen displays. Select Live Bookmarks from the drop-down list and click

Subscribe Now.

3The following screen displays. Select Bookmarks Menu and click Add.

4From the Firefox’ s Bookmarks Menu, select Download Notify to check the updates of your NAS’s

download list.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

171

14.8 Printer Server Tutorial

Do the following to have the NAS let computers on your network share a printer. See

www.zyxel.com for a list of compatible printers.

1Make sure the NAS is on and the SYS light is on steady (not blinking).

2Use a USB cable to connect the printer’s USB port to one of the NAS’s USB ports. Make sure the

printer is also connected to an appropriate power source.

3Turn on the printer.

4The NAS detects the printer after a few moments.

5On your computer, open your CIFS file sharing program (Windows Explorer for example) and

browse to the NAS. Double-click the printer’s icon.

6If you get a warning screen, click the option that lets you continue (Yes in this example).

NAS

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

172

7If your computer does not already have the printer’s driver installed, you will need to install it. In

this example, click OK.

8Use the wizard screens to install the printer driver on the computer. You may need to get the file

from the printer’s CD or the printer m anufacturer’ s website (the driver is not installed on the NAS).

Note: You must install the printer driver on each computer that will us e the printer.

After the driver installation finishes, the computer is ready to use the printer. Select the printer in

an application to use it to print. Browse to the NAS using a CIFS program (like Windows Explorer)

and double-click the printer’s icon to open the printer’s queue of print jobs.

Note: Re peat steps 5 to 8 on your other computers so they can also use the printer.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

173

14.9 Copy and Flickr Auto Upload Tutorial

Amy received some photos taken during her best friend’s wedding and saved the files on a USB

disk. She wants to save a copy of the photos in the NAS and upload the photos to her Flickr

account.

Amy has to activate the NAS’s auto upload feature. See Section 19.4 on page 262 for more details

on setting up a Flickr account for auto upload. In this example Amy select the NAS’ s photo share for

auto upload.

This is how Amy would transfer the files from her USB disk to the NAS.

1Click Applications > Copy/Sync Button in the navigation panel to open the screen.

2Configure the copy settings as shown and click Apply.

3Press and release the COPY/SYNC button on the NAS’s front panel to start copying files.

4The copied files can be found in a new folder in the photo share. The name of this folder is the date

(yyyy-mm-dd) and time (hh-mm-ss) when the folder is created.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

174

5The NAS also automatically uploads the copied files to Flickr.

14.10 FTP Uploadr Tutorial

FTP Uploadr can automatically upload files saved on the NAS to a remote FTP server. Amy wants to

share files on her NAS with Susan. They each have an NAS at home, so Susan has to set her NAS

as an FTP server for Amy to automatically send files using FTP Uploadr.

To set the NAS as an FTP server, click Applications > FTP to open the FTP screen. Select Enable

FTP and click Apply.

Amy’s NAS Susan’s NAS

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

175

Susan also has to create a user account and share on her NAS for Am y to upload files. The share is

used for files uploaded from Amy’s NAS. Amy will then use the following information to configure

FTP Uploadr on her NAS.

This is how Amy would set up the NAS’s FTP Uploadr.

1Click Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr to open the FTP Uploadr screen. Select

Enable FTP Uploadr and click Apply to turn on FTP Uploadr.

2Click Add Server.

3Enter the information as describe in Table 61 on page 175. Click Apply to add the server.

Ta ble 61 FTP Uploadr Tutorial: FTP Server Information

FTP Domain Name or IP Address example2.com

FTP Use r Na me Amy

FTP Password xxxxx

Share (Remote Path) Amy

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

176

4In the FTP Uploadr screen, click Preferences to configure the auto upload settings.

5Amy wants to share video files with Susan. In the Preferences screen, click the Add button and

select video from the Shares drop-down list box, enter a forward slash in the Path field and click

Apply to add the share to the Folder Watch List.

6Amy also set the Bandwidth Limit to 20 KB/s so that the upload doesn’t slow down her Internet

connection.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

177

Now Amy has set up FTP Uploadr to send files to Susan’s NAS. Every time Amy adds new files or

renames files in the video share, these new or modified files will be uploaded automatically to the

Amy share on Susan’s NAS.

Similarly, Susan can go through the steps described above to configure FTP Uploadr on her NAS.

Once Susan completes the setup, Amy can also receive files from Susan’s NAS.

14.11 Web Configurator’s Security Sessions

These tutorials show you how to configure security for the NAS’s Web Configurator sessions. You

will customize the NAS’s self-signed SSL certificate and distribute it to your users.

14.11.1 Customizing the NAS’s Certificate

1Click Maintenance > SSL and then select Edit a self-signed CA certificate and click Edit.

Amy’s NAS Susan’s NAS

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

178

2Next, let’s modify the certificate by changing the Common Name to this NA S’ s host name of “nsa”,

the Organization to “ZyX EL” and the Key Length to 2048.

3The NAS restarts its network services and returns you to the login screen.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

179

14.11.2 Downloading and Installing Customized Certificate

1Log in and return to Maintenance > SSL. Unde r Modify the Existing Certificate, click

Download.

2Save the file to your computer.

3Find the certificate file on your computer and double-click it.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

180

4Install the certificate. The rest of the steps in this section are an example of installing a certificate

in Windows. In the Certificate dialog box, click Install Certificate.

5In the Certificate Import Wizard, click Next.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

181

6Leave Automatically select certificate store based on the type of certificate selected and

click Next.

7In the Completing the Certificate Import Wizard screen, click Finish.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

182

8If you are presented with another Security Warning, click Yes.

9Finally, click OK when presented with the successful certificate installation message.

14.11.3 Turn on the NAS’s Web Security

Now that you have customized the NAS’s certificate and installed it in your computer, you can turn

on security for your Web Configurator sessions. This example uses Firefox 3.0.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

183

1Close your web browser and open it again to reset its session with the NAS. Log in and click

Control Panel > TCP/IP > Web Configurator. Select Enable HTTPS connection and click

Apply.

2A warning screen pops up if applying your change may disconnect some users. Click Yes to

continue.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

184

3The NAS logs you out and automatically redirects yo ur formerly n on-secure (HTTP) connection to a

secure (HTTPS) connection. Your browser may give you a warning about the device’s public key

certificate. Add an exception to allow your browser to bypass the warning.

4Click Add Exception.

5Click Get Certificate.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

185

6Before you add an exception, verify that the device to which you are trying to connect is providing

the correct certificate. Click View.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

186

7The SHA1 fingerprint must match the NAS’s certificate you downloaded from the NAS to your

computer. (Double-click the NAS’s certificate file and then click Details and look at the

Thumbprint). Click Close.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

187

8If the certificate fingerprints match, click Confirm Security Exception, otherwise click Cancel.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

188

9The login screen displays.

Now, anyone who connects to the NAS’s Web Configurator screens will automatically do so by

HTTPs. Use a secure method to let your users know the correct fingerprint for the NAS’s certificate

so they can check it before adding a security exception (as in steps 6 to 7 on pages 185 to 186).

See the next section for how to use FTPES with the NAS for secure FTP transfers.

14.12 Using FTPES to Connect to the NAS

This section covers how to use FTP over Explicit TLS/SSL with the NAS for secure FTP transfers.

Before you go through this section, read Section 14.11 on page 177 to configure HTTPS. This

example uses FileZilla.

1Open FileZilla and click File > Site Manager > New Site.

• Configure the Host field with the NAS’s address.

•Set the Servertype to FTPES - FTP over explicit TLS/SSL.

• Configure the account name and password.

• Click Connect.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

189

2A security warning screen displays. The SHA1 fingerprint must match the NAS’s certificate you

downloaded from the NAS to your computer. (Double-click the NAS’s certificate file and then click

Details and look at the Thumbprint). If they match, click OK.

The shares and folders to which Gonzo has access display. Now you can use FTP to securely transfer

files to or from the NAS. Use a secure method to let your users know the correct fingerprint for the

NAS’s certificate so they can check it before adding a security exception.

14.13 Using a Mac to Access the NAS

This tutorial shows you how to find the NAS on Mac OS X 10.5 (Leopard).

You can access the NAS in two ways:

•Use the Finder to browse for the NAS, or

•Use the Finder > Go option to connect to the NAS.

14.13.1 Finder

1Open a new Finder window.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

190

2Select All under the SHARED sidebar. Look for the NAS from the Network list.

3Expand the NAS to display the shares you may access.

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

191

14.13.2 Go Menu

4In the Finder, click Go > Connect to Server.

5When the Connect to Server dialog box opens, enter smb:// and the NAS’s IP address in the

Server Address field. You may also click Browse to have the Mac search for the NAS. Click

Connect.

6Once you establish the connection, you can access the NAS from the Finder or directly from the

desktop.

14.14 How to Use the BackupPlanner

Note: The screens and links in this section appear only after you have installed and

enabled BackupPlanner. BackupPlanner is an application that you can install using

Package Management (see Chapter 18 on page 246.)

Use the NAS’s BackupPlanner to have a backup of your files and folders.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

192

Schedule backups for times when the network is not busy (like at night or on weekends). For

example, you might do daily backups of important individual files or folders and a weekly general

archive. You can save backups to another location so y our files can survive even if the original RAID

or NAS fails.

14.14.1 Creating an Archive Backup

To backup the NAS every week to a remote NAS:

1Click Protect > Backup > Add Job.

Figure 93 Protect > Backup

2Identify the backup job and select Archive.

New files are often added to the shares that you need to back up and existing files are not

frequently changed so select Incremental. The NAS does a full backup first and later only copies

source files that are new and/or modified since the last backup. This example sets the NAS to do

another full backup after every four incremental backups.

Figure 94 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 1

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

193

3Select the volume1 check box to select all the folders and files.

Select Remote and enter the other NAS’s address, username, password, and share name.

If you want to make sure the remote NAS is reachable, click Test Connection.

Figure 95 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 2

4In this example, the target NAS is on the LAN so leave the compression off.

Security is already configured on the target NAS so you can leave the encryption off, too.

Have the NAS keep 3 backups.

Figure 96 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 3

5Set the frequency to Weekly. Schedule the backup for 5:00 every Saturday morning.

Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 4

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

194

14.14.2 Creating a Synchronization Backup

To create a synchronization backup:

1Click Protect > Backup > Add Job.

Figure 97 Protect > Backup

Name the backup job and select Synchronization.

You want only your current set of files in the Backup Photo folder of your External storage , so you

select Mirror to make the target folder identical to the source folder. The NAS deletes any other

files in the target folder.

Figure 98 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 1

2Select the folder that needs to be mirrored (your Photo folder in this example) and External.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

195

• Select the destination on the External (Backup Photo in this example).

• Click Next.

Figure 99 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 2

3Click OK in the warning dialog box.

Figure 100 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 3

4For this example, assume not many files need to be backed up so leave the compression off.

• Turn on the encryption to protect these sensitiv e files during the transfer. The final files stored

on the remote NAS will be unencrypted (usable).

• Restrict the bandwidth usage to 256 KB/s to stop the archives from using all of your network

connection’s available bandwidth.

• You don’t have to configure a purge policy for a synchronization backup.

• Click Next.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

196

Figure 101 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 3

5Schedule the backup to occur every morning at 3:00 and click Done.

Figure 102 Protect > Backup > Add Job: Step 4

You do not need to use a special restore process to use the files a synchronization backup creates.

The copy of files that the NAS creates on the other NAS’s Backups share can be used directly by

anyone with access to that share.

14.14.3 Restoring Archived Files by Backup Job

If you hav e backup jobs for which the NAS has already performed backups, you can restore the files

based on the backup job. Do the following:

1Click Protect > Backup screen, select a backup job and click Restore Archive.

Figure 103 Protect > Backup

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

197

2Select which backup to use and click Next.

Figure 104 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 1

3Select the files and folders you want to restore and click Next.

Figure 105 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 2

4Select the original location and click Done.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

198

Figure 106 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 3

5The NAS restores the files into the share. When it finishes you can access the files.

Figure 107 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Progress

14.14.4 Restoring by Backup Files

If you deleted an archive backup job or the NAS or the RAID arra y containing the backup job failed

you cannot restore archived files by the backup job. In this example, the NAS’s RAID array failed.

You’ve replaced the hard drives and re-configured the RAID. To restore by backup files:

1Click Protect > Restore. Specify where the archive files are located. In this example, enter

“192.168.3.2” as the IP addres s, “admin” as the account name, “1234” as the password, and

“Backups” as the share name. Click Test Connection. Click Next.

Figure 108 Protect > Restore: Step 1

EXAMPLE

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

199

2Select the backup job and backup time and click Next.

Figure 109 Protect > Restore: Step 2

3Select everything in the share except the recycle folder. Click Next.

Figure 110 Protect > Restore: Step 3

4Browse to the folder where you want to put the files. Click Done.

Chapter 14 Tutorials

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

200

Figure 111 Protect > Restore: Step 4

5The NAS restores the files and you can use them again.

201

PART II

Technical Reference

202

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

203

CHAPTER 15

Status Screen

15.1 Overview

This chapter describes the Status screen, which is the first advanced administration screen that

displays.

15.2 Status Screen

Click the Administration button in the Desktop screen (Chapter 12 on page 139) to open the

Web Configurator. From within the Web Configurator screens, you can also click Status on the top-

left of the navigation panel to display the status screen.

Figure 112 Status

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 62 Status

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status Click Status in the navigation panel to refresh the status screen st atistics.

System Information

Server Name This displays the name which helps you find the NAS on the network. Click the

Edit icon to go to the screen where you can configure this.

Model Name This displays which model thi s NAS device is.

Firmware Version This is the NAS firmware version. Click the Edit icon to go to the Maintenance >

FW Upgrade screen from which you can upload/upgrade new firmware.

Media Server Status This shows whether the media server function is enabled or disabled. It must be

enabled for media clients to play content files stored on the NAS. Click the Edit

icon to go to the screen where you can configure this.

FTP Server Status This shows whether the FTP server function is enabled or disabled. It must be

enabled to use FTP file transfer to/fro m the NAS. Click th e edit icon to go to the

screen where you can confi g ure this.

Chapter 15 Status Screen

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

204

Web Publishing Status This shows whether the Web server function is enabled or disabled. It must be

enabled to use HTTP to access shares on the NAS. Click the Edit icon to go to the

screen where you can confi g ure this.

UPS This shows the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) capacity. Click the Edit icon to

go to the screen where you can configure this.

Active Sessions This shows how many users are currently connected to the NAS.

Type This shows whether it’s a Windows/CIFS, web (web configurator), or FTP

connection to the NAS.

Share Name This displays the shared folder name on the NAS that the user is connected to for

CIFS sessions and is blank for FTP and web sessions.

Username This displays the name of the user connected to the NAS if one is defined.

ANONYMOUS FTP displays if a username is not defined for the user’s connection.

Connected At This displays the date and time the user last connected to the NAS in year, month,

day, hour, minute, second format.

IP Address This displays the IP address of the computer con nected to the NAS .

Ta ble 62 Status (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

205

CHAPTER 16

System Setting

16.1 Overview

This chapter gives an overview of the various features included in the system setting screens.

Upgrade the NAS firmware. Use package management to add more useful applications in your NAS.

Identify your NAS on the network and set the time that the NAS follows for its scheduled tasks/logs.

16.2 What You Can Do

•Use the Packages screens (Section 16.4 on page 207) to upload new firmware and download

and install applications from the web.

•Use the Server Name screen (Section 16.5 on page 209) to specify the NAS’s server and

workgroup names.

•Use the Date/Time screen (Section 16.6 on page 210) to set up date/time and choose a time

zone for the NAS.

16.3 What You Need to Know

Package Management

This feature enables you to install and use the following applications.

•Gallery - This web-based application allows your NAS to host pictures. Y ou can upload images in

your local computer or shares to this application. Use the Gallery administrator account (default

username admin, password 1234) to log into the Gallery console. There you can create accounts

for other users.

•NFS - NFS (Network File System) is a file-sharing protocol most commonly implemented on

Unix-like systems.

•NZBGet - This news grabber helps download files from UseNet.

•PHP-MySQL-phpMyAdmin - This tool can be used to manage MySQL through the web. Enter

'root' as the username and '1234' as the password to log in. This includes MySQL, PHP, and

phpMyAdmin.

•Logitech® Media Server - This enables you to manage a Logitech's Squeezebox device

connected to the NAS.

•TFTP - Use this to configure the NAS to accept log files from TFTP clients.

•Transmission - This Bit Torrent client supports adding tasks through torrent files and magnet

links.

Chapter 16 System Setting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

206

•WordPress - This allows you to create and manage a blog. Use the WordPress administrator

account (default username admin, password 1234) to log in. You can then create accounts for

other users.

•pyLoad - Use this to have the NAS manage your downloads including those from one-click

hosting sites. One-click hosting sites allow Internet users to easily upload files to the one-click

host's server so others can download them.

•Memopal - Use this to back up files on the NAS to your Memopal online backup and storage

account.

•ownCloud - Use this to store, synchronize, and share files, photos, calendars, and more with

computers and mobile devices.

•myZyXELcloud-Agent - Use this to go to mycloud.zyxel.com to set up a free DDNS hostname

for the NAS so you can connect to it easily from the Internet.

The following applications come with their own configuration screens and documentation:

• Gallery

•NZBGet

• PHP-MySQL-phpMyAdmin

• Logitech® Media Server

• Transmission

• WordPress

•myZyXELcloud-Agent

•ownCould

Windows/CIFS

Common Internet File System (CIFS) is a standard protocol supported by most operating systems

in order to share files across the network.

• CIFS is included by default in Windows operating systems.

• You can use Samba with Linux to use CIFS.

• CIFS transfers use security.

Time Lag

Time lag occurs when the time on the NAS falls behind the time on the time server. This may

happen if:

• the time server is no longer reachable

• if the NAS is shut down often (the NAS internal battery keeps time when the NAS is shut down

and this may cause possible variance)

• power surges occur.

The NAS gives no warning if time lag occurs. Y ou should resynchronize the time after a power surge

or after you have shut down the NAS several times.

Chapter 16 System Setting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

207

16.4 Package Management Screen

Use this screen to download and install applications from the web. See Chapter 18 on page 246 for

more about the features you can add to the NAS by installing packages.

Click System Setting > Packages to open the following screen.

Figure 113 System Setting > Packages

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 63 System Setting > Packages

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Package Management

Retrieve List From

Internet Click this to retrieve a list of available packages from the ZyXEL website.

Install/Upgrade Choose th e item(s) on th e list and click this to install the selected applic ation(s) on you r

system or upgrade to the latest version if you have previously installed the application.

Uninstall/Cancel

Installation Choose the item (s) on the list an d click this to uninstall the selected application(s) from

your system or cancel th eir active download(s) or install process/es.

This is only available if you have previously installed the package.

Enable This option is only for non built-in packages.

Choose the item(s) on the list and click this to enab le the applicatio n(s) on your

system.

This is only available if you have previously installed the package.

Disable This option is only for non built-in packages.

Choose the it em(s) on the list and click this to disable the application on your system.

You have to enable the application again in order to use it.

This is only available if you have previously installed the package.

Pac kage Inf o Select an item on the list and click this to display information about the package. See

Section 16.4.1 on page 208 for more details.

Chapter 16 System Setting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

208

Note: Once you install an application and enable it, additional links show up in the

navigation panel. This applies to NFS, TFTP Server, pyLoad, and Memopal.

Access the Gallery, NZBGet, PHP-MySQL-phpMyAdmin, Logitech® Media

Server, Transmission, WordPress, OwnCloud, and myZyXELcloud-Agent

applications’ web configurators through the Package Management screen.

16.4.1 Displaying the Package Information

Select an item on the list and click Package Info. Use this screen to check detailed information

about the application.

Figure 114 System Setting > Packages > Package Info

Status This is the current status of the applicati o n. It shows:

•Not Installed - This displays for applications that have not been installed by the

NAS.

•Installing (%) - This displays when the application is being inst alled. It also shows

the percent of th e package already insta ll ed.

•Built-in - This displa ys for applicati ons install ed by the NAS that y ou can configure

in the NAS Web Configurator.

•Enabled - This displa ys for applications ins talled and enabled by the NAS th at have

their own web configurators.

•Disabled - This displays for applications installed and disabled by the NAS that

have their own web configurators.

•Unknown - It is possible to get this status if the web location for the application is

unavailable.

Package Name This is the name of the application.

Requires This shows the other packages required in order to run this application.

Note: A package would be disabled/enabled simultaneously if its prerequisite package(s)

has been disabled/enabled. For example, when you enable WordPress, this also

enables PHP-MySQL-phpMyAdmin automatically. However when you enable

PHP-MySQL-phpMyAdmin, this does not automatically enable WordPress.

Version This is the version number of the item.

The icon indicates that the application has a newer version available. Move your

mouse over this icon to see the latest version number. Choose this item and click

Install/Upgrade.

Description This shows a brief description of the application.

Management

Page This shows the location of the screens or web configurator where you can manage the

application (after the package has been installed on the system).

Ta ble 63 System Setting > Packages

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 16 System Setting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

209

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

16.5 Server Name Screen

Click System Setting > Server Name to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure

your CIFS settings. In this screen you can set your server name and specify if your NAS is a part of

a workgroup.

Note: CIFS cannot be disabled on the NAS.

Figure 115 System Setting > Server Name

Ta ble 64 System Setting > Packages > Package Info

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status This is the current status of the application. It shows:

•Not Installed - This displays for applications that have not been installed by the NAS.

•Installing (%) - This displays when the application is being installed. It also shows

the percent of the package already installed.

•Built-in - This displays for applications installed by the NAS that you can configure in

the NAS Web Configurator.

•Enabled - This displays for applications installed and enabled by the NAS that have

their own web configurators.

•Disabled - This displays for applications installed and disabled by the NAS that have

their own web configurators.

Name This is the name of the application.

Size This is the size of the application at initial download.

Needed Space This is the needed space to complete the installation of the application.

Version This is the version numbe r of the application.

Requires This shows other package/s required to run this application.

Required By This shows which other packages require this application in order to be usable.

Management Page This shows the location of the screens, console or web configurator where you can

manage the application (after the package has been installed on the system).

Source This shows the location of the installed files of the application.

Description This shows a brief description of the item.

Close Click this to close the screen .

Chapter 16 System Setting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

210

The following table describes the labels in these screens.

16.6 Date/Time Screen

Use this screen to select a time zone and a time server from which your NAS can get the time and

date. This time is then used in NAS logs and alerts.

Click the System Setting link in the navigation panel and then click the Date/Time link to access

the Date/Time screen.

Figure 116 System Setting > Date/Time

Ta ble 65 System Setting > Server Name

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Server Name Enter a name to identify your NAS on the network in this field.

You can enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters with minus signs allowed but not as the

last character. The name must begin with an alphabet (a-z) and is NOT case sensitive.

Description Add text here to describe the NAS if the Server Name field is not enough. Use up to 61

characters. Yo u can use all characters except the following: /\:|[]<>+;,?=*"~.

Workgroup Name Type your workgroup name in this field. A workgroup is a group of computers on a

network that can share files. These user accounts are maintained on the NAS.

You can enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters with minus signs allowed but not as the

last character. The name must begin with an alphabet (a-z) and is NOT case sensitive.

Prevent NAS From

Being Master

Browser

Select this option if computer s in y our wo rkgroup are named with non-English characters

(such as Chinese and Russian). When you perform a search in the workgroup, this option

allows you to locate computers named with non-English characters.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore previously saved settings.

Chapter 16 System Setting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

211

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 66 System Setting > Date/Time

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Current System Date Time Setting

Current Time This field displays the time used by your NAS for its logs and alerts.

Current Date This field displays the date used by your NAS for its logs and alerts.

Date Time Setup

Manual Select this radio button to enter the time and date manually.

When you enter the time settings manually, the NAS uses the new setting once you click

Apply.

Note: If you enter time settings manually, they revert to their defaults when power is lost.

New Date

(yyyy-mm-dd) This field displays the last updated date from the time server or the last date configured

manually.

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new date in this field and

then click Apply.

New Time

(hh:mm:ss) This field displays the last updated time from the time server or the last time configured

manually.

When you set Time and Date Setup to Manual, enter the new time in this field and

then click Apply.

Get from Time

Server Select this check box to have the NAS get the time and date from the time server you

select in the Time Server Address field.

Time Server

Address Select a time serve r from the drop-down list box or select Specify my own time server

and enter the ti me server you wish to use in the field below . Check with your ISP/network

administrator if you are unsure of this information.

Synchronize

Now Click this for the NAS to retrieve the correct time from the co nfigured time server right

away.

Time Zone

Time Zone Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time

zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).

Manual Daylight

Saving Daylight saving is a period from late spring to fall when many countries set their clocks

ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.

Select this option to manually enter Daylight Saving Time settings. Clear this option to

have t he NAS automatically retrieve Da ylight Saving Time settings from th e Internet. The

NAS will download a new daylight saving resource file from the Internet every m onth.

Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Enable

Daylig ht Saving. The hour field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of

examples:

Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of

March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M.

local time. So in the United States you would use March, Second, Sunday, at 2:00.

Daylight Saving Ti me starts in the European Union on t he last Sunday of March. All of the

time zones in the European Union start using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment

(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select March, Last, Sunday.

The time you specify depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would

type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

Chapter 16 System Setting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

212

End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Enable

Daylig ht Saving. The o'clock field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of

examples:

Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November. Each

time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So

in the United States you would se lect November, First, Sunday, at 2:00.

Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October . All of the

time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment

(1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would select October, Last,

Sunday. The time you specify depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you

would type 2 because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC (GMT+1).

Offset Specify by how many hours to change the time for Daylight Saving Time.

Apply Click this to save your changes. If you configured a new time and date, Time Zone and

Daylight Saving at the same time, al l of the settings take affect.

Cancel Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Ta ble 66 System Setting > Date/Time (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

213

CHAPTER 17

Applications

17.1 Overview

This chapter discusses the features in the Application screens. The NAS contains various

applications for file sharing and downloading.

17.2 What You Can Do

•Use the FTP Server screen (Section 17.4 on page 215) to configure settings for FTP file transfers

to/from the NAS.

•Use the Media Server screens (Section 17.5 on page 216) to share files with media clients.

•Use the iTunes Server screens (Section 17.6 on page 218) to share files with iTunes users on

your ne two rk.

•Use the Download Service screen (Section 17.7 on page 219) to download files from the

Internet.

•Use the Web Publishing screen (Section 17.8 on page 230) to publish shares for people to

access files using a web browser.

•Use the Print Server screen (Section 17.9 on page 231) to share a printer.

•Use the Copy/Sync Button screen (Section 17.10 on page 232) to transfer files between a USB

device and the NAS.

•Use the Auto Upload screens (Chapter 19 on page 262) to upload files in selected shares to

your Flickr and/or YouTube accounts.

•Use the Syslog Server screen (Section 17.12 on page 243) to configure the NAS to accept

syslog logs from syslog clients.

•Use the Dropbox screen (Chapter 20 on page 274) to log the NAS into your Dropbox account.

•Use the Time Machine screen (Chapter 21 on page 278) to turn Time Machine support on or off,

and designate the share for Time Machine backups.

17.3 What You Need to Know

FTP

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a file transfer serv ice that operates on the Internet. A system running

the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client. FTP is not a secure

protocol. Your file transfers could be subject to snooping.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

214

FTPES (File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS/SSL)

File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS/SSL (FTPES) is a file transfer service that uses either TLS

(Transport Layer Security) or SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) for secure transfers across the Internet.

It requests for a mutual method of encryption from the FTP server for its file transfer sessions. Your

FTP client must be set to use FTPES as in the following example.

Figure 117 FTP Client Example

Media Server

The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the NAS

(without having to copy them to another computer). The NAS can function as a DLNA-compliant

media server and/or an iTunes server. The NAS streams files to DLNA-compliant media clients or

computers using iTunes. The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer

and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network.

iTunes Server

The NAS iTunes server feature lets you use Apple’s iTunes software on a computer to play music

and video files stored on the NAS. You can download iTunes from www.apple.com.

Download Service

The NAS’s download service downloads files from the Internet directly to the NAS. You do not have

to download to your computer and then copy to the NAS. This can free up your computer’s system

resources.

The NAS can download using these protocols.

• HTTP: The standard protocol for web pages.

• FTP: A standard Internet file transfer service.

• P2P download: Peer-to-peer files sharing protocol.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

215

Web Publishing

Web publishing lets you “publish” shares (containing folders and files) on the NAS so people can

access the files using a web browser without having to log into the Web Configurator. This way you

can share files with others without them having to know and enter a username and password.

For example, if you want to share photos in a FamilyPhotos share, you could “web publish” it and

others could use a web browser to access the photos at http://my-NAS’s-IP-Address/MyWeb/

FamilyPhotos.

RSS

RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a format for delivering frequently updated digital content. A

channel uses a feed to deliver its contents (items). Subscribe the NAS to a feed to be able to

download the contents.

17.4 FTP Server Screen

Use FTP or FTPES (FTP over Explicit TTL/SSL) to upload files to the NAS and download files from the

NAS. Click Applications > FTP Server to open the following screen.

Figure 118 Applications > FTP Server

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

216

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.5 Media Server Screens

The media server application allows you to share media files with media clients.

Ta ble 67 Applications > FTP Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

FTP

Enable FTP Y ou c an use FTP to send files to th e NAS or get files from the NA S. Select this check bo x

to allow users to connect to the NAS via FTP; otherwise clear the check box.

Connection Limit Enter the maximum number of concurrent FTP connections allowed on the NAS in this

field. See your screen for your model’s connection limit.

Idle Timeout Enter the length of time that an FTP connection can be idle before timing out. The

timeout limit is 300 minutes.

Port Number This is the port number used by the NAS for FTP traffic.

Enable Anonymous

FTP Access Select this check box to allow any user to log into the NAS using ‘FTP’ or ‘anonymous’

as a username and no password. Any other name is considered a username, so must be

valid and have a corresponding correct password.

Customize the port

range for data

transfer

Select this check box to assign a port range for FTP clients to use when downloadi ng

files from the NAS using passive mode.

The connection limit is restricted to half of the port numbers within the range if this

value is smaller than the one configured in the Connection Limit field. For example,

you specified a port range from 1024 to 1029 and configured 10 in the Connection

Limit field. The FTP connection limit will only be 3 (6 ports in the range divided by 2)

because it is the smaller value.

Starting Port Enter the first port number in the range. Choose from 1024 to 65535.

Ending Port Enter the last port number in the range. Choose from 1024 to 65535.

Download/Upload

Rate For All Users

(include admin)

Select this if you want to limit the download/upload bandwidth for all users who are

logged into the NAS, including the administrator.

•Max. Download Rate - Enter the download speed (in kilobytes/s) that the NAS

allows for users who are logged into the NAS.

•Max. Upload Rate - Enter the upload speed (in kilobytes/s ) that the NAS allows for

users who are logged into the NAS.

Download/Upload

Rate For

Anonymous Users

Select this if you want to limit the download/upload bandwidth for users who log into

the NAS using ‘FTP’ or ‘anonymous’ as a username and no pass word.

•Max. Download Rate - Enter the download speed (in kilobytes/s) that the NAS

allows for users who are logged into the NAS.

•Max. Upload Rate - Enter the upload speed (in kilobytes/s ) that the NAS allows for

users who are logged into the NAS.

Character Set The NAS uses UTF-8 (8-bit UCS/Unicode Transformation Format) format for F TP by

default. If the NAS’s folders, or file names do not display correctly in your FTP client,

select the appropriate language encoding here.

This setting appli es to all FTP client connections to the NAS. It does not affect your

Windows/CIFS connections (it will not correct the character display in Wi ndows

Explorer).

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

217

Click Applications > Media Server to open the following screen. Use this screen to view the

media server’s status and rebuild the media server database.

Figure 119 Applications > Media Server > Media Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.5.1 Media Server Share Publish Screen

Click Applications > Media Server > Share Publish to open the following screen. Use this

screen to select shares to publish (share with media clients like a media player or iTunes).

Figure 120 Applications > Media Server > Share Publish

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 68 Applications > Media Server > Media Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Twonky

Media Server Select this to have the NAS share the media files in the shares selected in the Share

Publish tab. Clear it to stop the NAS from sharing media files through the Playzone

screens or media players.

Click the hyper link to open the Twonky media server configuration screens to check

media server status or modify media server settings. See the help center in the Twonky

screens for details.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Ta ble 69 Applications > Media Server > Share Publish

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Publish Select this to have the media server share a share’s media files with media clients.

Share Name This column lists names of shares on the NAS.

Publish Musi c Tracks Select this to give media clients access to the share’s music files.

Publish Photos Select this to give media clients access to the share’s photo files.

Publish Videos Select this to give media clients access to the share’s video files.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

218

17.5.2 Media Server Logitech® Media Server Screen

Logitech® Media Server enables you to manage a Logitech Squeezebox device connected to the

NAS.

Click Applications > Media Server > Logitech® Media Server to open the following screen.

This screen is available when the Logitech® Media Server application is installed using Package

Management (see Section 17.5.2 on page 218). Use this screen to turn the Logitech® Media Server

application on or off.

Figure 121 Applications > Media Server > Logitech® Media Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.6 iTunes Server Screen

Click Applications > iTunes Server to open the following screen. Use this screen to turn the

iTunes server on or off.

Figure 122 Applications > iTunes Server

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Ta ble 69 Applications > Media Server > Share Publish

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 70 Applications > Media Server > Logitech® Media Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Logitech®

Media Server Chec k this to enable Logitech® Media Server.

Click the hy per link to open the Logit ech media serv er screens where you can pla y files

and change settings See the help center in the Logitech media server screens for

details.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

219

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.7 Download Service Screen

The Download Service screen allows you to download files from the Internet.

Click Applications > Download Service to open the following screen. Use this screen to manage

the NAS’s file downloads.

Note: By default, the NAS saves downloads in the admin share’ s download folder.

Figure 123 Applications > Download Service

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 71 Applications > iTunes Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable iTunes

Server Check this to let anyone on your network u se iTunes to play music files in the published

shares.

Apply Cl ick this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Ta ble 72 Applications > Download Service

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Download

Service Use this option (an d cl ick the Apply button ) to tu rn the down load s ervice of f or on. If you

turn off the service, all downloads are paused. Files currently downloading are queued.

Turning on the download service resumes downloads (or restarts them if they are not able

to resume).

Enable Download

Notify Use this option (and click the Apply button) to turn the download service notification off

or on. See Section 17.11.3 on page 236 for more details about this feature.

At the time of writing, the NAS supports RSS 2.0 feeds.

Click this to get and subscribe to the NAS channel feed. This enables you to keep track and

download the NAS’s new contents (items).

Add After you find a file to download, copy the file’s URL. Then log into the NAS web

configurator and go to the Applications > Download Server screen and click this

button. A screen opens where you create a new download task. You can paste the file’s

URL or use a P2P download file.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

220

Preferences Click this to open a screen where you can set the default location for saving downloads

and configure your P2P download sett ings.

Refresh Click this to update the information displayed on the screen.

Select Files A single P2P download torrent file is often for multiple files. If you do not need all of the

files the torrent file specifies, click this to select which files to download.

Delete To delete download tasks (or manually clear out completed download tasks), select a

download task and click this to remove it from the list. A pop-up screen asks you to

confirm. Click Apply to delete or Cancel to quit. When you delete a download task, you

are given the option to delete the associated files. Selecting this option deletes a

downloaded file and in the case of a P2P download task, also deletes the related .tor rent

file.

Use your keyboard’s [SHIFT] key to select a range of download tasks. Use the [CTRL] key

and click individual download tasks to select multiple individual download tasks.

Pause Select a downloading item and click this to temporarily stop the download. Paused

downloads appear in the Download Service screen’s Inactive tab.

Use your keyboard’s [SHIFT] key to select a range of download tasks. Use the [CTRL] key

and click individual download tasks to select multiple individual download tasks.

Resume Select a paused item and click this to continue downloadin g the file.

Select a completed item and click this to re-seed a P2P file or download a file again. If you

want to re-seed a P2P task, keep the P2P file and the completed file in their original

locations.

Task Info Select an item on the list and click this to display information about the download task.

See Section 17.7.6 on page 229 for more details.

The table lists your downloads. Click a column’s heading to sort the entries by that criteria.

Active Click this to see the list of files the NAS is currently downloading or sharing with other P2P

users. The NAS handles a maximum of 10 active tasks at a time (or fewer depending on

how much of the NAS’s system memory is available). If you add more, they appear in the

Inactive tab.

P2P downloads may appear in the Inactive tab for a while before showing in the

Downloading tab. The NAS automatical ly moves c ompleted tasks to the Completed tab.

Inactive Click this to see the list of files th at are queued (waiting in line) for the NAS to download or

the downloads that have been manually paused.

Completed Click this to see the list of files that the NAS has finished downloading.

The Location column shows where a downloaded file is saved on the NAS. Cl ick on the

location link to open the share browser and access the file.

Error Click this to see the list of files that the NAS was not able to download. The NAS

automatically retries unsuccessful download attempts. The download displays in the error

tab when the re-attempts are also unsuccessful and the NAS stops trying to download the

file. To try the download again, use the Add button to create a new download task.

Ta ble 72 Applications > Download Service (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

221

Status The following icons show the download’s status.

Completed: The NAS has downloaded the whole file.

Seeding: The download is finished and the NAS is allowing other P2P users to download

it.

Downloading: The NAS is getting the file.

Queued: The downlo ad is waiting in line for the NAS to download it.

Pause: The download has been manually stopped. Select it and click Resume to continue

it.

Error: The NAS was not able to complete the download. Select it and click Resume to

reattempt the download.

Name This identifies the download file. A “...” indicates an abbreviated name. Hold your cursor

over the name to disp lay the full name.

Complete

(%) This is the percentage of the file that the NAS has downloaded.

Location This appears in the Completed tab.

It displays the path for where the file is saved. Click on the location link to open the share

browser and access the file.

Seeds Seeds apply to P2P downloads. This is the number of computers that are sharing the

complete file that you are downloading.

This value is in the format “Leeches(Seeds)” where Leec hes refer to peers that do not

have a complete copy of the file yet and are still downloading; Seeds refer to peers that

have the complete file.

Peers Peers apply to P2P downloads. This is the number of other computers that are also

downloading (and sharing) the file you are downloading.

This value is in the format “ConnectedPeers(AllPeers)[Health]” where Connec ted Peers is

the number of computers to which the NAS is connected in order to download the file;

AllPeers refer to the total number of computers to which the NAS can connect in order to

download the file; Health indicates the availability of the file.

Download

Speed This is how fast the NAS is getting the file.

It is normal for a P2P download to start out with a slow download speed since it has to set

up numerous connections. The speed should increase as the download progresses and

decrease near the en d of the download.

Upload Speed This is how fast the NAS is sending the file to other P2P users.

Time Left This is how muc h longer (in hours, minute s, and seconds) it should take to finish the

download at the current download speed.

Priority This is the downl oad’ s priori ty on the NAS. You can set a currently downloading or queued

download to high or automatic priority. Y ou can set a download to high priority to have the

NAS try to download it before the other files. However the actual download speed depends

more on factors like the speed of you Internet connection, the speed of the download

source’s Internet connection, how many others are trying to download at the same time,

the peers and seeds available and ge neral network conditions.

Error Code This appears in the Error tab.

This shows the tag for the error that occurred.

Error

Message This appears in the Error tab.

This message states what went wrong with the download.

Ta ble 72 Applications > Download Service (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

222

17.7.1 Adding a Download Task

Click Applications > Download Service > Add to open the following screen. Use this screen to

specify a file for the NAS to download. Section 14.7 on page 162 provides a tutorial on adding a

download task.

Figure 124 Applications > Download Service > Add

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 73 Applications > Download Service > Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Source

URL Paste the URL or magnet link of the file you want to download into this field. The URL can

be for an HTTP, FTP, or P2P download. A magnet link is for a P2P download.

For a P2P download using a magnet link the NAS automatically downloads the file related

to the magnet link.

For a P2P download using a .torrent file, you can copy and paste the URL of the .torrent

file. The NAS will automatically do wnload the .torrent file and use it. You do not have to

manually download the .torrent file or save it to your computer.

Note: Make sure the link opens either the file you want or a pop-up window about how to

handle the file.

It is also OK for the link to open a .torrent file. If you are redirected to a screen that says

the download should start in a few seconds, there may be a link to click if the download

does not start automatically. See if that link opens the file or the pop-up window.

Torrent File A “torrent” file has information t he NAS uses to do a P2P download. A torrent file uses a

.torrent extension. If you already have a torrent file saved on your computer, select the

Torrent File option and specify its path or click Browse and look for its location.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

223

17.7.2 Configuring General Download Settings

Click Applications > Download Service > Preferences to open the following screen. Use this

screen to set the default location for saving downloads and configure the download period.

Location of

Downloaded Files This shows where the NAS stores new downloads (Put incomplete downloads in) and

where the NAS moves completed downloads (Move completed downloads to).

The Share column shows the name of the share where the file is downloaded.

The Path column points to the lo cation in the share wher e the NAS will save th e

downloaded files.

• P2P download jobs are stored in /*/incoming (where ‘*’ is a folder that you have set.)

• HTTP/FTP jobs are stored in /* (where ‘*’ is a folder that you have set.)

• All jobs triggered by RSS channels create the subfolder in /* using the channel name

where it stor e all files downloaded from that channel (where ‘*’ is a folder that you

have set.)

Edit Click this to open the following screen where you can set the de fault folder loca tion where

you “Put incom p le t e downloads in” and “Move complete downloads to”:.

•Share - Select the share from the list.

•Path - Type the folder location in the share directly or click Browse to open the

following screen and navigate to the file’s location.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Folder Name - Enter a new folder name and click to create it.

•Type - This identifies the item as a folder or file.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Select a folder. If you don’t select a folder, a forward slash (/) displays in the Path field.

All contents within the specified share are automatically selected.

Click Apply to save your settings an d Cancel to close the screen.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 73 Applications > Download Service > Add (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

224

Figure 125 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > General Settings

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 74 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > General Settings

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Location of

Downloaded Files This shows where the NAS stores new downloads (Put incomplete downloads in) and

where the NAS moves completed downloads (Move completed downloads to ).

The Share column s hows the name of the share where the file is downloaded.

The Path column points to the location in the share where the NAS will save the

downloaded files.

• P2P download jobs are stored in /*/incoming (where ‘*’ is a folder that you have set.)

• HTTP/FTP jobs are stored in /* (where ‘*’ is a folder that you have set.)

• All jobs triggered by RSS channels create the subfolder in /* using the channel name

where it store all files downloaded from that channel (where ‘*’ is a folder that you

have set.)

Edit Click this to open the following screen where you can set the default folder location where

you “Put incomplete downloads in” and “Move complete downloads to”:.

•Share - Select the share from the list.

•Path - Type the folder location in the share directly or click Browse to open the

following screen and navigate to the file’s location.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

225

17.7.3 Configuring the P2P Download Settings

Click Applications > Download S e rvic e > Preferences > P2P download to open the following

screen. Use this screen to configure P2P download settings.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Folder Name - Enter a new folder name and click to create it.

•Type - This identifies the item as a file or folder.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Select a folder. If you don’t select a folder, a forward slash (/) displays in the Path field.

All contents within the specified share are automatically selected.

Click Apply to save your settings and Cancel to close the screen.

Download Period

Control This feature sets the NAS to download files only within a specified time period.

Enable Download

Period Control Use the check box to turn the download period control on or off.

Download Service

is active in th e

time period

(hh:mm -

hh:mm)

Specify the time period for the NAS to download files.

Note: If you also configured the Power On/Off Schedule feature in the Power

Management screen, make sure your active download period does not conflict with

the power-off period.

Apply Click this to save your chan ges.

Reset Cl ick this to restore your previously saved settings.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 74 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > General Settings (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

226

Figure 126 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > P2P download

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 75 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > P2P download

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Port Number Assign a port number for P2P downloads. You can select a number from 2 to 65536. It

is recommended to use a port number greater than 1025.

DHT Select Enable or Disable to use Distributed Hash Table (DHT) or not.

Note: When you use DHT, the NAS will also attempt to open a UDP port one number

smaller than the P2P download port number. So if the P2P download port number

is 9090, the NAS uses UDP port 9089.

Max. download rate Y ou may need to limit the bandwidth the NAS uses for P2P downloads if your network’s

other Internet applications are not getting enough downstream bandwidth. 0 has the

NAS impose no restriction.

Max. upload rate You may need to limit the bandwidth the NAS uses to share files through P2P download

if your network’s other Internet applications are not getting enough upstream

bandwidth. 0 has the NAS impose no restric tion.

If you do not allow any uploads, (for example, you set a limit of 1 KB/s) you will not

have a good standing in the P2P download community.

Note: The settings for maximum download/upload rates would not affect peers accessing

the NAS from the same LAN.

Maximum Number

of Active Torrents Specify how many simultaneous P2P downloads are allowed on the NAS. You can enter

a number from 1 to 10.

Maximum Number

of Seeding Jobs Specify how many simultaneous seeds are allowed on the NAS. Enter a number from 1

to 10. This value cannot exceed the one you configured in the Maximum Number of

Active Torrents field.

Maximum Number

of Active

Connections

Specify how man y active connecti ons are allowed on the NAS. En ter a number from 1 to

500. This specifies the number of comp uters that can connect to the NAS to download

files being shar ed by the NAS.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

227

17.7.4 Edit IP Filter

Use this screen to enable or disable IP filtering for P2P downloads. IP filtering blocks IP addresses

known to share fake files. You can either get an IP filter table from a website or u se your own table.

Click Edit IP Filter in the Applications > Download Service > Preferences > P2P download

screen.

Figure 127 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > P2P download > Edit IP Filter

K eep Sharing While With P2P download, the NA S starts sharing a file while you are downloading it. Set how

long to continue sharing a file after the NAS finishes the download.

Select Upload/Download Ratio to keep sharing a file until the NAS has uploaded a

specific percent compared to the download.

Select Seeding Time to keep sharing a file for a specific number of minutes after the

download finishes.

Continuing to share a file helps other P2P download users finish downloading it. Sharing

out at least as much as you download helps keep you in good standing in the P2P

download community.

Enter -1 to sh are a fil e indefi ni tely. Lea ve both c heck bo x es bl ank to ha ve the NAS stop

sharing the file as soon as the download finishes.

If you select both options, the NAS keeps sharing a file until both conditions exceed the

values you configure. For example, you entered 150% in the Upload/Download Ratio

field and 120 minutes in the Seeding Ti m e f ield. The NAS keeps sharing a file until it

has shared 1.5 times the size of the file and has passed 120 minutes.

Email notific a tions Select whether or not to send emails to the email address configured for emailing log

reports (see Section 26.4.2 on page 308) when the NAS starts downloading the file,

seeding the file, and/or finishes downloading the file.

Edit IP Filter Click this to enable or disable IP filtering for P2P downloads.

Refer to Section 17.7.4 on page 227 for information about the fields in this screen.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 75 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > P2P download (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

228

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.7.5 Selecting Files to Download

Select an item in the Applications > Download Service screen’s list and click Select Files to

open the following screen. Use this screen to select which of the torrent’ s files to download. Section

14.7 on page 162 provides a tutorial on adding a download task.

Figure 128 Applications > Download Service > Select Files

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 76 Applications > Download Service > Preferences > P2P download > Edit IP Filter

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable IP Filt er Click this to enable or disable IP filtering for P2P downloads.

Update IP Filter

Table File from

the Internet

Every Week

Select this option and enter a URL to use an online IP filter table. Y ou can find an online

IP filter table in websites such as http://www.bluetack.co.uk/config/level1.gz.

When you change the URL of the online IP filter table, the NAS also performs an update

after you click Apply.

Upload IP Filter

Table Select this option to upload your own IP filter table. Use the Browse button to lo cate

the file and click Upload to save it on the NAS.

The NAS supports .txt, .dat, .gz, .tgz, and .tar.gz file extensions. The NAS saves the IP

filter table as /admin/download/ipfilter.dat.

Download Current

IP Filter Table Click this to save a copy of the IP filter table on your computer.

Apply Click Apply to update the IP filter table from the specified URL.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 77 Applications > Download Service > Select Files

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Select Files

File Name This is the name of a file specified in the torrent file. Select the check boxes of the files you

want to download.

Size This is the size of the file to be downloaded.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

229

17.7.6 Displaying the Ta sk Information

Select an item on the list and click Task Info. Use this screen to check detailed information about

the task.

Figure 129 Applications > Download Service > Task Info

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 77 Applications > Download Service > Select Files (continue d)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 78 Applications > Download Service > Task Info

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status This is the current status of the task.

Name This is the name of the task.

Size This is the size of the file to be downloaded.

Uploaded/

Downloaded Ratio This is the ratio of total uploaded data to downloaded data.

Complete(%) This field displays how much has been downloaded to the NAS.

Seeds This is the number of computers th at are sharing the complete file that you are

downloading.

Peers This is the number of other computers th at are also downloading (and sharing) the file

you are downloading.

Download Speed This field displays how fast the NAS downloads the file.

Upload Speed This field displays how fast the NAS uploads the file.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

230

17.8 Web Publishing Screen

Use this screen to turn web publishing on or off and select shares to publish. Click Applications >

Web Publishing to open the following screen.

Figure 130 Applications > Web Publishing

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Health This field displays how many full copies of the file are available for this task. The NAS

can download a file with a higher health v alue more efficiently. If the health v alue is less

than 1 (0.65 for example) , there is no full copy of the file, and the NAS may not be able

to complete downloading the file.

Time Left This is the time remaining to complete the task.

Priority Use this field to set the priority for downloading the task.

Select Auto to have the NAS automatically determine the task’s priority.

Select High to have the NAS download this file before the other files.

Comment Enter a description for this task. Click Apply to save the description.

Start Time This field displays when the NAS started to download files.

Completed on This field displays when the file was successfully downloaded to the NAS.

Info-Hash This information is used to verify the torrent file.

Tracker This field displays the tracker that NAS is currently connected to. A tracker is a server

used for finding peers sharing the file.

Close Click this to close the scre en.

Ta ble 78 Applications > Download Service > Task Info (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 79 Applications > Web Publishing

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Web Publishing

Disable / Enable

Web Publishing Turn on web publishing to let people access files in the published shares using a web

browser, without having to log into the Web Configurator.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

231

Note: If you installed php-MySQL-phpMyAdmin through the Package Management

screen (Section 18.6 on page 251) and enable it, you can use PHP and MySQL in

your published web page.

17.9 Print Server Screen

Use the Print Server screen to view and manage the NAS’s list of printers and print jobs.

Click Applications > Print Server to open the following screen.

Figure 131 Applications > Print Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Support HTTPS Select this to allow users to use web browser security for connections to the web-

published shares. In order to use s ecured connections users must use “https://” in the

NAS’s web address and install the NAS’s public key certificate.

Por t Number Specify a port number for accessing the published share websites hosted on the NAS. If

you enter a number other than 80, make sure you include it when telling others how to

access the web-published share. F or example, sa y you specified port 8080 , the NAS’ s IP

address is 192.168.1.2 3, and the name of the web-publishe d share is F amilyPhotos. Y ou

would have to enter “http://192.168.1.23:8080/MyWeb/FamilyPhotos/” in your

browser’s address bar to access the share’s web page.

Unpublished Shares This list box displays the shares that the NAS does not publish for web browser access.

Publish Selec ted

Share(s) Select shares in the Unpublis hed Shar es box and click this to let people access files in

the published shares using a web browser, without logging into the Web Configurator.

Use the [SHIFT] key to select a range of entries. Hold down the [CTRL] key to select

multiple individual entries.

Published Shares This list box displays the shares people can access using a web browser, without logging

into the Web Configurator.

Unpublish Selected

Share(s) Select shares in the Published Shares box and click this to not let people access using

a web browser without logging into the Web Configur ator. Use the [SHIFT] key to select

a range of entries. Hold down the [CTRL] key to select multiple individual entries.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously saved settings.

Ta ble 79 Applications > Web Publishing (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 80 Applications > Print Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Refresh Click this to update the list of printers and print jobs.

The table lists printers and their queued print jobs. Click a column’s heading to sort the entries

by that criteria.

Status This fields shows whether the printer is connected and turned on (on-line) or not (off-line).

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

232

17.9.1 Print Server Rename

Click Applications > Print Server and a printer’s Rename icon to open the following screen. Use

this screen to change the name the NAS uses for the printer.

Figure 132 Applications > Print Server > Rename

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

17.10 Copy/Sync Button Screen

The Copy/Sync button on the front panel allows you to copy or synchronize files between a

connected USB or SD device and the NAS.

Click Applications > Copy/Sync Button to open the following screen.

Name This identifies the printer. Each printer connected to the NAS must use a unique name.

Actions Rename: Click this to change the name the NAS uses for the printer.

Cancel Job: Click this to remove all print jobs from the NAS queue for a particular printer.

However, since the NAS sends print jobs to the printer as soon as it can, this button may only

have an effect if there are very large or many print jobs in the queue. To stop a print job that

has already started, you may have to turn off the printer.

Delete: Click this to remove a printer from the NAS’s printer list. To add the printer back into

the list, disconnect the printer from the NAS’s USB port and reconnect it. If that does not work,

disconnect the USB port and turn off the printer’s power. Then reconnect the printer and turn it

back on.

Ta ble 80 Applications > Print Server (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 81 Applications > Print Server > Rename

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Name Type a new name to identify the printer. The name must be unique from all the other names of

printers connected to the NAS.

Apply Cl ick this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen with out saving.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

233

Figure 133 Applications > Copy/Sync Button

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 82 Applications > Copy/Sync Button

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Copy Settings

NAS Copy Target Select the NAS share to use with the co py function.

USB Volume If your USB or SD device has multiple partitions, select which partition to use with the

copy function.

Copy Direction Select USB -> NAS to copy files from your USB or SD device to the NAS.

Select NAS -> USB to copy files from the NAS to your USB or SD device.

Create a New Folder

for Copied Files Select this option to place th e copied files in a new folder.

The name of the folder created for the copied files consists of the date and time of the

copy in year_month_day_hour_minute_second format.

Backup Files to be

Replaced This option is only available if you do not select Create a New Folder for Copied

Files. Select this option to s ave the fil es that will be replaced by the source files.

Backup Target Select a share in which to save the backup files.

Note: The NAS will not create a new folder to store the backup files. It is recommended to

create a specific share (such as “backup”) for backup purposes.

Sync Settings

NAS Sync Target Select the NAS share to use with the synchronization function.

USB Volume If your USB device has multiple partitions, select which partition to use with the

synchronization function.

Sync Direction Select USB -> NAS to synchronize files from your USB or SD device to the NAS.

Select NAS -> USB to synchronize files from the NAS to your USB or SD device.

Select NAS <-> USB to synchronize files in both directions simultaneously.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

234

17.11 Technical Reference

This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.

17.11.1 Sharing Media Files on Your Network

The media server feature lets anyone on your network play video, music, and photos from the NAS

(without having to copy them to another computer). The NAS can function as a DLNA-compliant

media server and/or an iTunes server. The NAS streams files to DLNA-compliant media clients or

computers using iTunes. The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a group of personal computer

and electronics companies that works to make products compatible in a home network.

• Publish shares to let others play the contained media files.

• The media server is a convenient way to share files you download.

• Hardware-based media players can also play the files. See page 354 for the supported

multimedia file formats.

Note: Anyone on your network can play the media files in the published shares. No user

name and password or other form of security is used. The media server is enabled

by default wi th the vide o, photo, and music shares published.

Songs from the iTunes Store

After using iTunes on your computer to download songs from Apple’s iTunes Store, you can copy

them to the NAS. Many of these songs have DRM (Digital Rights Management). At the time of

writing, you can use your Apple account ID and password to authorize up to a total of five

computers to play the files. To authorize a computer, open iTunes and click Store > Authorize

Computer.

A link for the NAS in iTunes under SHARED. Click it to display the NAS’s published media files as

shown next.

Backup Files to be

Replac ed o r

Removed

Select this option to save the files that will be replaced by the source files.

Backup Target Select a share in which to save the backup files.

Note: The NAS will not create a new folder to store the backup files. It is recommended to

create a specific share (such as “backup”) for backup purposes.

Apply Click this to save your chan ges.

The configuration file is saved on the USB device.

Reset Cl ick this to restore your previously saved settings.

Ta ble 82 Applications > Copy/Sync Button (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

235

Figure 134 NAS link in iTunes

17.11.2 Download Service

The NAS’s download service downloads files from the Internet directly to the NAS. You do not have

to download to your computer and then copy to the NAS. This can free up your computer’s system

resources.

The NAS can download using these protocols.

• HTTP: The standard protocol for web pages.

• FTP: A standard Internet file transfer service.

• P2P download: Peer-to-peer files sharing protocol.

Note: Do not use the NAS for illegal purposes. Illegal downloading or sharing of files can

result in severe civil and criminal penalties. You are subject to the restrictions of

infringements thereof. ZyXEL bears NO responsibilit y or liabil ity for your use of the

download service feature.

Torrent Files

The NAS needs a “.torrent” file for P2P download to download a file. The torrent file gives the NAS

information about the file to be downloaded (and shared) and the tracker(s) (computers) that

coordinates the distribution of the file.

When you add a P2P download task in the NAS’ s web configu rator screens, y ou can copy and paste

the URL of the torrent file. The NAS automatically downloads the torrent file and saves it in a

torrent folder within the folder where the NAS s t ores downloaded files ( the admin share’s

download folder by default).

If you already have the torrent file saved on your computer, you can just specify its location when

adding a download task through the web configurator. Another method is to use FTP or a CIFS

program (Windows Explorer for example) to copy the torrent file into the torrent folder. The NAS

automatically uses the torrent file.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

236

After your P2P download and sharing are finished, you can go to the incoming folder within the

destination share or folder and delete the .torrent file if you need to free up hard disk space.

17.11.3 Download Service Notification

Use the download service notification to keep track of downloaded files on the NAS. You can

subscribe to the NAS’s download list on your computer. When the NAS finishes downloading new

files, your RSS reader displays the information and links for the files. You can also download the

files from the RSS reader to your computer.

See Section 14.7.3 on page 168 for a tutorial about using the download service notification.

In the Download Service screen, select Enable Download Notify and click Apply. An RSS feed

icon appears. Click the icon to subscribe to the NAS’s download list.

Note: The download service notification only keeps track of files downloaded via P2P

download.

Figure 135 Download Service Notification

17.11.4 P2P Download Security

When you download using P2P, you reveal your IP address. This increases the risk of hacking

attacks, which can be protected against by a good firewall.

Use a Hardware-based Firewall

Place a hardware-based firewall between your network and the Internet (a software-based firewall

on your computer would just protect the computer itself, not the NAS since your computer is not

between your NAS and the Internet).

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

237

Figure 136 Firewall

Ideally your firewall should have the following:

• Stateful packet inspection to control access between the Internet and your network and protect

your NAS (and computers) from hacking attacks.

• IDP (Intrusion Detection and Prevention) to detect malicious packets within normal network

traffic and take immediate action against them.

• Anti-virus to check files you download for computer viruses.

P2P Download and Your Firewall

The anti-virus feature on a firewall probably cannot check P2P downloads for viruses, so use anti-

virus software on your computer to scan the NAS for viruses.

When you download using P2P download, many other P2P download users are also trying to

download the file from you. The firewall slows this down because by default, it only allows traffic

from the Internet in response to a request that originated on the LAN (it lets you get files from the

Internet and blocks those on the Internet from getting files from you).

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

238

Figure 137 Firewall Blocking Incoming P2P Download Requests

To speed up P2P download file transfers, configure y our f irewall’s port forwarding to send in coming

TCP port 9090 and UDP port 9089 connections to the NAS. You probably need to use y our firew all’s

HTML (web-based) configuration interface to set this up (see the firewall’s manual for details). You

may also have to configure a corresponding firewall rule.

Figure 138 Firewall Configured to Allow Incoming P2P Download Requests

17.11.5 Web Publishing Example

This example covers how to configure the Web Publishing screen to let people use a web browser

to access a share named F amilyPhotos without logging into the W eb Configur ator and shows how to

access the share through the Internet.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

239

1Click Applications > Web Publishing and configure the screen as shown (enable the web

publishing and move FamilyPhotos over to Published Shares) and click Apply.

Figure 139 Applications > Web Publishing (Example)

2Now open your web browser and type in the address of the NAS’s FamilyPhotos web page. In this

example, the NAS’s IP address is 192.168.1.33, and the name of the web-published share is

FamilyPhotos. So you would enter “http://192.168.1.33/MyWeb/FamilyPhotos/” in your browser’s

address bar. Then press [ENTER] or click Go. A screen displays listing the share’s files.

Figure 140 Browsing to an NAS Share Example

• Click a file’s link to open the file.

• Right-click a file’s link and select Save Target As.. (in Internet Explorer) to save a copy of the

file.

• Click a label in the heading row to sort the files by that criteria.

• To customize how the page looks and works, create an index.html or index.htm file and store it in

the share.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

240

17.11.6 Web Publishing

Web publishing lets you “publish” shares (containing folders and files) on the NAS so people can

access the files using a web browser without having to log into the Web Configurator. This way you

can share files with others without them having to know and enter a user name and password.

For example, if you want to share photos in a FamilyPhotos share, you could “web publish” it and

others could use a web browser to access the photos at http://my-NAS’s-IP-Address/MyWeb/

FamilyPhotos.

Note: The NAS does not use any security for the files in the published folders. It is not

recommended to publish shares if you do not have the NAS behind a good

hardware-based firewall. See page 236 for more on firewalls.

Additionally, you can use HTML editing software (not included) to create an index.html or index.htm

file to define and customize how your website works and looks.

Accessing Web-published Shares from the Internet

You need to use a public address to access the NAS’s web-published shares from the Internet. If

your NAS uses a private IP address, you may need to use the public IP address of your Internet

gateway and configure NAT or port forwarding on y our Internet gatewa y and possibly firewall rules

in order to let people access the NAS’s web-published shares from the Internet.

Web Publishing Port Number

If the web-published shares use a port number other than 80 (the normal port for web traffic),

users must include it after the NAS’ s IP address in order to access the NAS’ s web-published shares.

For example, say you specified port 8080, the NAS’s IP address is 192.168.1.23 , and the name of

the web-published share is FamilyPhotos. You would have to enter “http://192.168.1.23:8080/

MyWeb/FamilyPhotos/” in your browser’s address bar to access the share’s web page.

The NAS’ s web configurator uses port 80. To make the web configurator more secure, y ou can have

the web-published shares use another port num ber. Then you can configure one set of firewall rules

and NAT or port forwarding settings on your Internet gatew ay specifically for allowing access to the

web-published shares and another separate set of rules for accessing the NAS’s web configurator.

17.11.7 Printer Sharing

The NAS can act as a print server. A print server lets multiple computers share a printer. Connect a

printer to the NAS’ s USB port to let multiple computers on your netw ork use it. See www .zyx el.com

for a list of compatible printers.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

241

Figure 141 Printer Sharing

17.11.8 Copying Files

Y o u can copy files from a USB device to the NAS or from the NAS to a USB device. Simply press and

release the COPY/SYNC button to start copying files. See Section 17.10 on page 232 for details

about configuring the copy settings.

The following figure illustrates how copying files works when you copy files from a USB device to

the NAS. The same concept applies when you copy files from the NAS to a USB device.

Figure 142 Copying Files Example

Both storage devices contain file A.

Before Copy

After Copy

USB NAS

ABAB

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

242

• A copy of files A and B from the USB device is transferred to the NAS.

• File A from the USB device replaces file A on the NAS.

17.11.9 Synchronizing Files

Synchronization mak es the contents on the target device identical to the ones on the source device.

You can synchronize files from a USB device to the NAS or from the NAS to a USB device. In

addition, you may also synchronize files in both directions simultaneously.

Press and hold the COPY/SYNC button until you hear a beep to synchronize files. See Section

17.10 on page 232 for details about configuring the synchronization settings.

USB -> NAS or USB <- NAS

When you synchronize files in one direction, contents on the source device replace the files on the

target device.

The following figure illustrates how synchronization works when you synchronize files from a USB

device to the NAS. The same concept applies when you synchronize files from the NAS to a USB

device.

Figure 143 Synchronizing Files Example 1

Both storage devices contain A.

• A copy of files A and B from the USB device is transferred to the NAS.

• File A from the USB device replaces file A on the NAS.

• File C on the NAS is deleted.

Before Sync

After Sync

USB NAS

AB AB

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

243

USB <-> NAS

When you synchronize files in both directions simultaneously, both storage devices transfer unique

files to one another. Files with the same file name are synchronized according to their modification

date/time. The difference in modification time between the two files has to be greater than five

minutes. More recently modified files overwrite the older ones during synchronization.

The following figure illustrates how synchronization works when you synchronize files in both

directions simultaneously.

Figure 144 Synchronizing Files Example 2

A on the USB device and B on the NAS are modified more recently.

• File A from the USB device replaces file A on the NAS.

• File B from the NAS replaces file B on the USB device.

• A copy of file C from the USB device is transferred to the NAS.

• A copy of file D from the NAS is transferred to the USB device.

17.12 Syslog Server Screen

Use this screen to configure the NAS to accept syslog logs from syslog clients such as ZyXEL’s G-

4100 v2.

Note: You may need to configure an y firew alls between the NAS and the syslog clients in

order to let the syslog traffic go to the NAS.

Before Sync

After Sync

USB NAS

ABCD

(new)

(new) (new)

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

244

Click Applications > Syslog Server to open the following screen.

Figure 145 Applications > Syslog Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 83 Applications > Syslog Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Syslog

Server Select this to have the NAS accept syslog logs from syslog clients. Clear i t to

stop the NAS from acceptin g syslog logs from syslog clients.

Log Location Click View Files to browse to where y ou want to store the syslo g logs on th e

NAS.

Shares Select the share in which to store the syslog logs.

Path Use this if you want to further specify a folder within the share. This field

displays the share folder’s path. Type the location of the folder using forward

slashes as branch separators or use Browse to find or create a folder on the

NAS.

After you click Apply in the Sy slog Server screen the NAS creates a folder

for the current month’s logs. The folder’s name uses the year and month in

YYYYMM format.

Purge Policy Select Enable Purg e Po licy and set a number of months in the Log

Deletion Interval field that displays to have the NAS delete the syslog

messages after keeping them for the specified period of time.

Regardless of how you set the purge policy, to save hard disk space the NAS

archives the syslog logs in a .tgz file on the second day of each month and

deletes the original folder and syslog files. The NAS creates a new folder for

the syslog logs it receives after that. You can use a zip program such as 7-zip

to open the archives.

Chapter 17 Applications

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

245

Log Format Select the format you want to use for recording the received logs.

The Example item below the drop-down list boxes displays how the selected

custom format looks. For example, if you select Ful l Date , the individual log

entries would display with something like 2009 May 13 17:15:51 in front of

them.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Cli ck this to restor e the screen’s last-saved settings.

Ta ble 83 Applications > Syslog Server (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

246

CHAPTER 18

Packages

18.1 Overview

This chapter describes screens for features you can add to the NAS by installing packages. See

Section 16.4 on page 207 for how to manage packages.

18.2 What You Can Do

•Use the NFS screen (Section 18.3 on page 247) to configure the Network File System (NFS)

settings of your NAS.

•Use the TFTP Server screen (Section 18.4 on page 250) to configure the NAS to accept log files

from TFTP clients.

•Use the pyLoad screen (Section 18.5 on page 251) to configure the NAS so you can have it

manage your downloads including those from one-click hosting sites.

•Use ownCloud (Section 18.6 on page 251) to store, synchronize, and share files, photos,

calendars, and more with computers and mobile devices using an ownCloud client.

•Use Memopal (Section 18.7 on page 254) to back up files on the NAS to your Memopal online

backup and storage account.

•Use the GoogleDriveClient screens (Section 18.8 on page 256) to synchronize local NAS shares

or folders and Google Drive accounts.

Access the following applications’ configuration screens through the Package Management

screen. Refer to the applications’ own documentation for further information.

•Gallery - This web-based application allows your NAS to host pictures. Y ou can upload images in

your local computer or shares to this application. Use the Gallery administrator account (default

username admin, password 1234) to log into the Gallery console. There you can create accounts

for other users.

•Use Logitech® Media Server (Section 17.5.2 on page 218) to manage a Logitech Squeezebox

device connected to the NAS.

•The NZBGet news grabber helps download files from UseNet.

•PHP-MySQL-phpMyAdmin can be used to manage MySQL through the web . E nter 'root' as the

username and '1234' as the password to log in. This includes MySQL, PHP, and phpMyAdmin.

•Transmission - This Bit Torrent client supports adding tasks through torrent files and magnet

links.

•WordPress - This allows you to create and manage a blog. Use the WordPress administrator

account (default username admin, password 1234) to log in. You can then create accounts for

other users.

•myZyXELcloud-Agent - Use this to go to mycloud.zyxel.com to set up a free DDNS hostname

for the NAS so you can connect to it easily from the Internet.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

247

18.3 NFS Screen

Use this screen to enable and configure Network File System (NFS) settings on your NAS.

NFS is a client/server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network

environments. This allows shared folders in your NAS to be accessible like a local folder in a user’s

computer.

Click Network > NFS to open the following screen.

Figure 146 Network > NFS

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

You see a warning screen before you delete a volume.

Ta ble 84 Network > NFS

LABEL DESCRIPTION

NFS Service

Enable NFS Server Click this to employ NFS in your NAS.

Disable NFS Server Click this to stop using NFS.

This makes all NFS shares unavailable.

Add NFS Share Click this to add an NFS share.

Refer to Section 18.3.1 on page 248 for the Add NFS Share screen.

NFS Session Click this to view active NFS sessions. You can see the list of users who have access to

the NFS shares.

Refer to Section 18.3.2 on page 249 for the NFS Session screen.

Edit NFS Share Select an NFS share from the list and click this to edit it.

Refer to Section 18.3.1 on page 248 for the Edit NFS Share screen.

Delete NFS Share

(s) Select an NFS share from the list and click this to delete it.

The table lists your NFS shares. Click a column’s heading to sort the entries by that criteria.

Status This shows whether the share i s active or not.

NFS Share Path This shows the location of the share in the NAS.

Volume Name This shows the volume where the NFS share is located.

DN/IP Filter This shows whic h domain name(s) or IP address(e s) have read/wri te access to the NFS

shares.

Refer to Section 18.3.1 on page 248 for the screen where you can configure this.

Comment This shows a short descripti o n of the share.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

248

Figure 147 Delete an NFS Share

18.3.1 Add/Edit NFS Share

Use this screen to add or edit an NFS share.

Note: Some attributes of the NFS share cannot be edited.

Click Add or Edit in the Network > NFS screen to open the following:

Figure 148 Network > NFS: Add/Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 85 Network > NFS: Add/Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Volume Name Select the volume where the folder you want to add as an NFS share is located.

NFS Share Name Enter the name you want to give to the NFS share.

Full Path This shows the location of the NFS share in the NAS.

The NFS server assigns this path to the share folder you input.

Comment Enter a short description for the share.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

249

18.3.2 NFS Session

Use this screen to view a list of active NFS sessions. Y ou can see which users are connected the NFS

shares.

Click NFS Session in the Network > NFS screen to open the following.

Figure 149 Network > NFS: NFS Session

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

DN/IP Filter Enter the domain name(s) or IP address(es) that can have access to the NFS share.

Enter ‘*’ to make the share available to all users in the network. You can also enter a

wildcard, such as ‘*.domain.com’ to indicate that all users within that network have

access to the share.

Select the access ri ghts you want to grant to each domain name or IP address you

enter and click Add.

•Read Only - Users with this access right can only view and copy files in the NFS

share but cannot modify or delete them.

•Read/Write - Users with this access right can view, edit or delete files in the NFS

share.

Note: NFS v4 supports Read/Write only, and NFS v3 supports both Read Only and

Read/Write.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 85 Network > NFS: Add/Edit (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 86 Network > NFS: NFS Session

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Type This shows if the NFS share is active or not.

NFS Share Path This shows the location of the share in the NAS.

Username This shows the username of the active user connected to the NFS share.

Connected At This displays the date and time the us er last conn ect ed t o th e NA S i n y e ar, month, day,

hour, minute, second format.

IP Address This shows the IP address of the user accessing the NFS s hare.

OK Click this to close the window.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

250

18.4 TFTP Server Screen

Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP and often used

for transmitting large nu mbers of small files. Use this screen to configure the NAS to accept log files

from TFTP clients such as ZyXEL’s G-4100 v2.

Note: You may need to configure any firewalls between the NAS and the TFTP clients in

order to let the log files go to the NAS.

Click Applications > TFTP Server to open the following screen.

Figure 150 Applications > TFTP Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 87 Applications > TFTP Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable TFTP Server Select this to have the NAS accept log files from TFTP clients. Clear it to stop the NAS

from accepting log files from TFTP clients.

Upload / Download

Directory Setting Click View Files to browse to where you want to store the log files on the NAS.

Shares Select the share in which to store the log files.

Path Use this if you want to further specify a folder within the share This field displays the

share folder’s path. Type the location of the folder using forward slashes as branch

separators or use Browse to find or create a folder on the NAS.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Cli ck this to restor e the screen’s last-saved settings.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

251

18.5 pyLoad Screen

Use this screen to configure the NAS so you can use pyLoad to manage your downloads, including

those from one-click hosting sites.

Click Applications > pyLoad to open the following screen.

Figure 151 Applications > pyLoad

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

18.6 ownCloud Setup

Use the Package Management screen to install the ownCloud package. Use ownCloud to store,

synchronize, and share files, photos, calendars, and more with computers and mobile devices. Use

the following procedure to install the ownCloud package.

1Click Packages > Package and select ownCloud. Then click the Install/Upgrade icon.

Note: If ownCloud does not appear, click the Retrieve List from Internet icon to upd ate

the list.

Ta ble 88 Applications > pyLoad

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable pyLoad Select this to have the NAS manage your downloads. Clear it to turn the feature off.

Management Page This is the IP address and port number of the NAS’s pyLoad management login screen .

The pyLoad management login screen uses the NAS’s IPv4 address and the port

number you configure. Click this link to go to it.

Username Only the admi n account can log into the py Load management screen.

Password Y ou can configure a separ ate password for using the admin account to access the NAS’s

pyLoad management screen.

Password (Co n firm) Type the same password again to make sure you entered it correctly.

Port Numb er Set the pyLoad management page’s port number. The range of valid port numbers is

1024~65536. Include this port number after the IP address when manually entering

the pyLoad management login page’s address in your browser’s address bar. For

example, 192.168.1.2:7272.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Cli ck this to restor e the screen’s last-saved settings.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

252

2The following confirmation screen appears. Select the volume in which to install ownCloud and

store ownCloud data and click Apply. The NAS must have a conn ection to the Internet to download

the package.

3The installation progress appears in the ownCloud row.

4A link appears in the Management Page column after installation finishes. Click this link.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

253

5The ownCloud login screen appears. Create an administrator user name and password and click

Finish Setup.

6The main ownCloud screen displays. Use this web interface to manage files on the NAS ownCloud

server. Click your user name in the upper-right corner to see the h elp for more information on using

ownCloud.

Note: Get ownCloud desktop clients from owncloud.org and ownCloud mobile apps from

Google Play or the Apple App Store.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

254

18.7 Memopal

Install the Memopal package to back up folders of files on the NAS to your Memopal online backup

and storage account.

Note: Deleting files from your Memopal account’s online backup set does not del ete the

files from the NAS, just as deleting a file from the NAS does not delete a backup

copy in your Memopal account’s online backup set.

Deleting a file or a folder from your Memo pal account’ s online backup set deletes all

versions of that file from the online backup set.

Click Applications > Memopal to open the following screen.

Figure 152 Applications > Memopal

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

255

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 89 Applications > Memopal

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status This shows the status of the Memopal application’s interaction with the Memopal server.

Disabled: The NAS Memopal application is turned off.

Starting: The backup job i s initializing and the NAS is getting ready to back up.

Running: The backup job is executing.

Stopped: The backup job is stopped. This may be due to a network error, remote

server error, or other issue.

Completed: The backup job finished.

To Backup The number of files remaining to back up.

Backed up The number of files backed up already.

Failures The number of files the NAS failed to back up to the Memopal server.

Upload Speed This is how fast in Bytes per second the NAS is backing up to the M emopal server.

Progress This shows the perc entage of the files already backed up from the total files to be

backed up.

Restart Backup Re-scan all files and perform a backup.

Retry Failures Only re-scan and back up files the NAS failed to back up.

Backup Report Display back up record details.

Enable Memopal Select this to back up files to y our Memopal account. The rest of the configuration fields

display.

Email Enter the email address you use for your Memopal account.

Password Enter the password for your Memopal account.

Limit File Size Select this and enter a number of MegaBytes if you want to restrict the siz e of fil es the

NAS uploads to the Memopal account. You have to enter your password again if you

select this.

Enable Schedule Select this to set when the Memopal backups occur. You have to enter your password

again if you select this. Clear this to have the NAS back up files in the selected folders

to your Memopal account in real-time whenever you add or modify the files.

Weekly Select this to perform a Memopal backup on a weekly basis. The NAS performs the

backup job every Sunday at 2:00 AM and continues until the job finishes.

Daily Select this to perform a Memopal backup every day. The NAS performs the backup job

every day at 2:00 AM. Use hours to specify for up to how many hours the NAS ca n

perform a Memopal backup. Enter 0 in hours to have the NAS continue the backup job

until it finishes (no time limit).

Hourly Select this to perform a Memopal backup every hou r. Use minutes to specify for up to

how many minutes the NAS can perform a Memopal backup. Enter 0 in minutes to

have the NAS continue the backup job until it finishes (n o time limit).

Share Name This is the name of the share containing a folder the NAS Memopal application backs up

to the Memopa l server.

Path This field displays the share folder’s path.

Actions Click the Delete icon to remove the folder from the list of folders the NAS Memopal

application backs up to the Memopal server.

Share Select the share containing the folder to back up to the Memopal server.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

256

18.8 GoogleDriveClient

Use GoogleDriveClient to synchronize local NAS user folders and Google Drive cloud storage

accounts. This two-way synchronization means changes in the Google Drive account appear in the

local sync folder and changes in the local sync folder appear in the Google Drive account.

Note: Do not store your only copy of a document in Google Drive or the local sync folder.

• Modifying or deleting a file or folder at either end modifies or deletes it at the other end.

• Moving a file out of the local sync folder or Google Drive deletes it at the other end.

•Use the Protect screens instead of Google Drive for backups (see Chapter 27 on page 321).

• You can link multiple NAS user accounts to Google accounts.

• You can link an individual NAS user account to multiple Google accounts.

• You can only link each individual Google account to one NAS user account.

• This feature does not currently download Google Documents.

18.8.1 Account Setting Screen

Use the Account Setting screen to synchronize local NAS shares or folders and Google Drive

accounts.

Click Applications > GoogleDriveClient to open the following screen.

Path Identify the folder to back up to the Memopal server.

Use Browse to find or create a folder on the NAS or type the location of the folder

using forward slashes as branch separators.

Click Add to add the folder to the list of folders the NAS Memopal application backs up

to the Memopa l server.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Cli ck this to restor e the screen’s last-saved settings.

Ta ble 89 Applications > Memopal (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

257

Figure 153 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Account Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 90 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Account Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Linked Account Select a Google account linked to an NAS user account.

Click Add to open a screen where you can link an NAS user account and a Google

account.

Click Delete to remove the NAS’s link to the selected Google account. You must disable

the Google Driv e feature for th e account before you can do this. A screen pops up to let

you decide what to do with the data in the NAS’s linked local sync folder.

Click Yes to delete all data in the local sync folder. Click No to remove the link to the

selected Goo gle account but keep the data in the local sync folder. Click Cancel to do

nothing (keep the account link and data).

Binding User The NAS user accou nt linked to the selected Google account.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

258

18.8.2 Account Setting Add Screen

Use the Account Setting Add screen to link an NAS user account and a Google account. Click

Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Ad d to open the following screen.

Note: The user has to log into the Google account on the same computer to allow the

NAS to link to it.

Figure 154 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Account Setting > Add

Status The current status of the GoogleDrive feature for the selected Googl e account.

•Disabled - The GoogleDrive feature is turned off. During this state you can use the

other sections of this screen to add or delete linked accounts or enable Google

Drive.

•Enabled - Waiting - The GoogleDrive feature is configured, enabled, and waiting

to perform the next Google Drive update. During this state you can use the other

sections of this screen to add or delete linked accounts or disable Google Drive.

•Enabled - Synchronizing - The GoogleD rive feature is synchroniz ing the local

sync folder and the Google account. During this state you can use the other sections

of this screen to add linked accounts during this state.

Local Sync Folder The NAS folder or share the NAS synchronizes with the linked Google account.

Capacity The Go ogle account’s used, available, and total online Google Drive storage space.

Enable GoogleDrive Select this to have the NAS periodically synchronize the selected linked account’s local

sync folder and Google Drive storage. You can enable synchronizing with Google Drive

for individual accounts and disable it for other accounts.

Clear this option to disable synchronizing the selected linked account’s local sync folder

and Google Drive storage.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Ta ble 90 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Account Setting (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

259

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 91 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Account Setting > Add

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 1 Specify the folder on the NAS to synchronize with Google Drive for the local user.

Share Name The name of a share on the NAS containing the fol d er the NAS synchronizes with

Google Drive.

Path The location of the folder the NAS synchronizes with Google Drive.

Edit Click this to open the following screen where you can specify the share or folder to

synchronize with Google Drive. The NAS’s sharing configuration must allow the user

access. The user must also have a large enough quota on both th e NAS and Google

Drive to hold whatever files go in the local sync folder and in the Google Drive account

(since they both end up containing everything you put in either).

•Share - Select the share from the list.

•Path - Type the folder location in the share or click Browse to navigate to the

folder. Use a “/” to synchronize the entire share.

Step 2 Select the local NAS user account to link with Google Drive.

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

260

Step 3 Click the link to get the authorization code from Google. The user must sign into the

Google account. You may need to sign out of Google’s services first if another user

account is already signed in.

The NAS GoogleDriveClient fea ture uses the Grive app. Review what the Grive app

wants to use and click Accept if you agree.

Copy the code and paste it into the field in the Web Configurator screen.

Click Apply to have the NAS co nnect to Goo g le and complete the authorization.

In the Account Setting screen, select the Enable Google Drive option and click

Apply to start synchronizing your files with Google Drive.

Ta ble 91 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Account Setting > Add (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 18 Packages

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

261

18.8.3 Update Period Screen

Use the Update Period screen to set how often the NAS synchronizes with Google Drive. The NAS

initiates the connections, thus you do not hav e to configure rules on a firewall located in front of the

NAS to allow access.

Click Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Update Period to open the following screen.

Figure 155 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Update Period

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Apply Click this to save your changes and complete the authorization.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 91 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Account Setting > Add (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 92 Applications > GoogleDriveClient > Update Period

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Update Period Specify how frequently the NAS synchronizes the local sync folders and the linked

Google Drive accounts. The range is 1 to 4320 minutes (3 days).

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

262

CHAPTER 19

Auto Upload

19.1 Overview

This chapter discusses the features in the Auto Upload screens.

The auto upload feature uploads media files stored in the NAS to the Flickr and/or YouTube sharing

websites. Besides web publishing and media server, auto upload is another convenient w ay to share

media files with your friends and family. Y ou can lin k the NAS to your Flickr and/or YouTube account

and select shares for the NAS to upload. The NAS uploads the media files stored in the specified

shares to your Flickr and/or YouTube account. When you add new files to the specified shares, the

NAS also automatically uploads the new files to your Flickr and/or YouTube account.

19.2 What You Can Do

•Use the Flickr/YouTube screen (Section 19.4 on page 262) to upload photos and videos to your

Flickr and YouTube accounts.

•Use the FTP Uploadr screen (Section 19.5 on page 270) to upload files to FTP servers.

19.3 What You Need to Know

FTP

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a file transfer serv ice that operates on the Internet. A system running

the FTP server accepts commands from a system running an FTP client. FTP is not a secure

protocol. Your file transfers could be subject to snooping.

FTPES (File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS/SSL)

File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS/SSL (FTPES) is a file transfer service that uses TLS

(Transport Layer Security) or Secure Socket Layer (SSL) for secure transfers across the Internet.

19.4 Flickr/YouTube Screen

Use this screen to upload photos and videos to your Flickr and YouTube accounts.

Click Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube to open the following screen.

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

263

Figure 156 Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

19.4.1 Configuring the Flickr Settings

In the Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube screen, select Flickr from the list and

then click the Config button.

The following screen displays if you have not authorized the NAS to use a Flickr account. Click OK

to continue the authorization process.

Figure 157 Linking NAS to Flickr

The web browser opens the Yahoo! Flickr login page. Enter your Yahoo account’s information and

click Sign In.

Ta ble 93 Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Flickr/YouTube

Disable/Enable Select a service from the list and click this to turn the service on or off.

If you disable the service and add more files to the watch folder(s ), the NAS will not

auto upload these files. However, the NAS still uploads any files added before you

turned off the service.

Pause/Resume Select a service from the list and click this to pause or resume the auto upload feature.

Config Select a service from the list and click this to manage the service’s settings.

Status This field displays the service’s status.

The service may be Enabled, Disabled, Uploading or Paused.

Service Name This field displays the name of a sharing website to which the NAS can automatically

upload files.

Account

Information This field displays the username and related information of the account to use with the

auto upload feature.

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

264

Figure 158 Yahoo! Flickr Login Page

The following page displays asking for your authorization. Click OK, I’LL ALLOW IT to establish a

link between the NAS and your Flickr account.

Figure 159 Flickr Authorization

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

265

A confirmation page displays indicating successful authorization. Return to the NAS web

configurator. Click Get Ready in the following screen to complete the authorization process.

Figure 160 Confirming Flickr Authorization

Once the NAS is associated with your Flickr account, you can configure auto upload settings in the

following screen.

Figure 161 Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube > Config (Flickr)

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

266

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 94 Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube > Config (Flickr)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Flickr Account Configuration

Username This field displays the Flickr account authorized for the auto upload feature.

Photo Space Usage This shows how much storage space for photos (in size and percentage) you have

used and how much space is still available on your Flickr account.

Video Files Usage This shows how many videos you have uploaded and how many videos you can still

upload to your Flickr ac count.

Switch User Click this to use a different Flickr account for the auto upload feature.

Folder Selection

Folder Watch List This tabl e displays a list of shares and folders selected for auto upload. Files stored in

these locations are uploaded to your Flickr account.

Status This indicates whether the folder or shar e is available.

represents a valid folder. The folder is available for auto upload.

represents a missing fol der. The share may be deleted from the NAS, or the hard

disk was removed from the NAS.

Share Name This is the share selected for auto u p load.

Path This is the path of a folder selected for auto upload. The NAS only uploads files stored

in the specified share or fo lder to your Flickr accoun t.

Action Use the Remove icon to remove a folder from the Folder Watch List.

Add Click this to open the following screen where you can set a folder that contains files you

want the NAS to automatically upload.

•Share - Select the share from the list.

•Path - Type the folder location in the share directly or click Browse to open the

following screen and navigate to the folder’s location.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Folder Nam e - Enter a new folder name and click to create it.

•Type - This is the type of the folder/file.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Select a folder. If you don’t select a folder, a forward slash (/) displays in the Path field.

All contents within the specified s hare are automatically selected.

Click Apply to save your settings and Cancel to close the screen.

Grace Period

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

267

19.4.2 Configuring the YouTube Settings

In the Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube screen, select YouTube from the list and

then click the Config button.

Note: Your YouTube account must be associated with a Google account.

Get a Google account and use it to log into YouTube. You can then merge the existing YouTube

account to your Google account.

If you hav e not authorized a YouTube account on the NAS, the following screen displays. Enter your

Google account’s e-mail address and password in the fields and click OK to authorize the service.

Figure 162 YouTube Account Settings

Grace Period N

minutes Specify how long the NAS should wait when you add a new file for auto upload. For

example, if you set the grace period to 5 minutes, the NAS uploads a new file after it

has been in a watched folder for 5 minutes. Y ou can choose from a range of 1 to 10080

minutes (up to one week).

Default Privacy

Who can see your

media files on

Flickr?

Determine who has t he right to see files uploaded to your Flickr account.

Select Only You if you do not w ant anyone else to see your fi les. You may also restri ct

the access to Your friends and/or Your family. You ca n set up a friend/family list in

your Flickr account.

Select Anyone to allow everyone to see your files.

Hide from public site

area Check this o ption to prev ent others from fin ding your fi les when they perform a search

in the Flickr website.

Default Safety Level Assign a safety level to your files.

Select Safe if the contents of your files are suitable for the general public.

Select Moderate if the contents of your files may be offensive to some people.

Select Restricted if the contents of your files are not suitable for certain people, such

as children or your colleagues.

Default Content

Type Select a content type for your files. You can choose Photo/Video, Screenshots/

Screencasts, or Illustration/Art/Animation/CGI.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Cli ck this to restore previously saved settings.

Ta ble 94 Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube > Config (Flickr) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

268

Once the NAS is associated with your YouTube account, you can configure auto upload settings in

the following screen.

Figure 163 Applications > Auto Upload > Flickr/YouTube > Config (YouTube)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 95 Applications > Auto Upload > Config (YouTube)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

YouTube Account Configuration

Username This field displays the Youtube account authorized for the auto upload feature.

Switch User Click this to use a different YouTube account for the auto upload feature.

Folder Selection

Folder Watch List This table displays a list of shares and folders selected for auto upload. Files stored in

these locati ons are uploaded to your YouTube account.

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

269

Status This field indicates whether the share or folder is available.

represents a valid folder. The folder is available for auto upload.

represents a missing folder. The share may be deleted from the NAS, or the hard

disk was remove d from the NAS.

Share Name This field displays the share selected for auto upload.

Path This field displays the path of a folder selected for auto upload. The NAS only uploads

the files stored in the specified share or folder to your YouTube account.

Action Use the Remove icon to delete a folder from the Folder Watch List.

Add Click this to open the following screen where you can set a folder that contains files you

want the NAS to automatically upload.

•Share - Select the share from the list.

•Path - Type the folder location in the share directly or click Browse to open the

following screen and navigate to the folder’s location.

•Current Location - This is the location of th e selected folder.

•Folder Name - Enter a new folder name and click to create it.

•Type - This is the type of the folder/file.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Select a folder. If you don’t select a folder, a forward slash (/) displays in the Path

field. All contents within the speci f ied share are automatically selected.

Click Apply to save your settings and Cancel to close the screen.

Grace Period

Grace Period N

minutes Specify how long the NAS should wait when you add a new file for auto upload. For

example, if you set the grace period to 5 minutes, the NAS uploads a new file after it

has been in a watched folder for 5 mi nutes. You can choose from a range of 1 to 10080

minutes (up to one week).

Video Category Select the category that best describes the media files you want to upload.

Default Privacy

Who can see your

media files on

YouTube?

Determine who has the right to see files uploaded to your YouTube account.

Select Only You if you do not want anyone else to see your files.

Select Anyone to allow everyone to see your files.

Apply Cl ick this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore your previously stored settings.

Ta ble 95 Applications > Auto Upload > Config (YouTube) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

270

19.5 FTP Uploadr Screen

The FTP Uploadr feature uploads files stored in the NAS to FTP servers. Besides web publishing and

media server, auto upload is another convenient way to share media files with your friends and

family. You can link the NAS to the FTP server or the FTP server on another NAS and select shares

or folders for the NAS to upload. The NAS uploads th e files stored in the specified shares to the FTP

server. When you add new files to the specified shares, the NAS also automatically u ploads the new

files to the FTP server.

Use this screen to configure the FTP Uploadr.

Click Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr to open the screen shown next.

Figure 164 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 96 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable FTP Uploadr Use the check box to enable or disable the FTP Uploadr. Click Apply to save your

changes.

When you disable the FTP Uploadr, a screen opens requesting confirmation. Select the

check box to stop any current or queued uploads. If you do not select the check box,

the FTP Uploadr will finish uploading the files that are already in the queue list. Clicking

Yes will disable the FTP Uploadr.

Add Server Click this to add a target FTP server entry. See Section 19.5.1 on page 271 for more

details.

Preferences Click this to manage the settings of the FTP Uploadr.

Edit Server Select a server from the list and click this to edit the FTP server entry.

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

271

19.5.1 Adding or Editing an FTP Server Entry

Use this screen to add or edit an FTP server entry for auto upload.

In the FTP Uploadr screen, click the Add Server or Edit Server button to open the following

screen.

Figure 165 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr > Add or Edit a Server

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Delete Sele c te d

Server(s) Select a server from the list and click this to remove the FTP server entry.

Server Information Select a server from the list and click this to display the status and settings about the

FTP server.

Domain Name/IP

Address This is the domain name or IP address of the FTP server.

Port Number This is the port number used by the FTP server.

Remote Path The NAS automatically uploads files to this location of the FTP server.

Account Name This is the login account for the FTP server.

Description This is the information related to the FTP server.

Ta ble 96 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 97 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr > Add or Edit a Server

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Domain Name/IP

Address Enter the domain name or IP address of the FTP server.

Account Name Enter the account name used to access the FTP server.

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

272

19.5.2 FTP Uploadr Preferences Screen

Use this screen to configure the general settings for the FTP Uploadr.

In the FTP Uploadr screen, click the Preferences icon to open the following screen.

Figure 166 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr > Preferences

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Password Enter the password associated with the account name.

Port Number Enter the port number for the FTP server.

Remote Path Enter the path of the FTP server where th e NAS automatically u p lo ads files.

Description Enter additional information about this FTP server.

Test Connection Click this to test your set tings and check whether you can use the settings to connect to

the FTP server.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 97 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr > Add or Edit a Server (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 98 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr > Preferences

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Folder Watc h List

Status This field indicates whether the share or folder is available.

represents a valid folder. The folder is available for auto upload.

represents a missing folder. The share may be deleted from the NAS, or the hard

disk was removed from the NAS.

Share Name This is the share selected for auto upload.

Path This is the path of a folder sel ected for auto upload. The NAS only uploads files stored in

the specified share or folder to your FTP server.

Action Use the Remove icon to delete a folder from the Folder Watch List.

Chapter 19 Auto Upload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

273

Add Click this to open the following screen where you can set a folder that contains files you

want the NAS to automatically uplo ad.

•Share - Select the share from the list.

•Path - Type the folder location in the share directly or click Browse to open the

following screen and navigate to the folder’s location.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Folder Name - Enter a new folder name and click to create it.

•Type - This is the ty pe of the folder/file.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Select a folder. If you don’t select a folder, a forward slash (/) displays in the Path field.

All contents within the specified sh are are automatically selected.

Click Apply to save your settings a n d Cancel to close the screen.

Settings

Grace Period Specify how long the NAS should wait when you add a new file for auto upload. For

example, if you set the grace period to 5 minutes, the NAS uploads a new file after it

has been in a watched folder for 5 minutes. Y ou can choose from a range of 1 to 10080

minutes (up to o ne week).

Bandwidth Limit Enter the maximum upload rate for auto upload. Yo u can choose from a range of 0 to

100,000 KB/s. Enter 0 if you do not want to set any limit.

Use this to leave bandwidth on your network connection for other traffic, especially if

your Internet connection has restricted upload speed.

Apply Click this to save your changes in this section.

Reset Click this to restore previously saved settings.

Close Click this to return to the previous screen wi thout saving.

Ta ble 98 Applications > Auto Upload > FTP Uploadr > Preferences (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

274

CHAPTER 20

Dropbox

20.1 Overview

The Dropbox Web-based file hosting service uses cloud computing to let you use file

synchronization to store and share files and folders with others across the Internet. Use your

Dropbox account to easily move files to your NAS and have the NAS download *.torrent files.

20.2 Dropbox Screen

Use the Dropbox screen to log the NAS into your Dropbox account. This creates Drop2NAS and

zDownload folders in your Dropbox account. See Section 20.3 on page 276 for how to use the

folders to move files to your NAS and have the NAS download *.torrent files. The NAS checks the

Dropbox account’s Drop2NAS and zDownload folders every three minutes.

Click Applications > Dropbox to open the following screen.

Figure 167 Applications > Dropbox

Chapter 20 Dropbox

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

275

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 99 Applications > Dropbox

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Status This shows the status of the NAS Dropbox application’s interaction with the Dropbox

server.

Disable: The NAS Dropbox application is turned off.

Ready: The NAS Dropbox application has authenticated with the Dropbox server and is

ready to use.

Authenticating with Dropbox. Please wait.: The NAS Dropbox application is logging

into the Dropbox server.

Failed to negotiate link with Dropbox. Please contact your vendor.: The NAS

cannot find the Dropbox server at the normal address.

Receiving file/folder from Dropbox tunnel.: The NAS is getting a file from your

Dropbox account.

Dropbox account has been already used on other NAS.: One Dropbox account can

only work with one NAS at a time. Log the other NAS out of your Dropbox account to be

able to use the account with this N AS.

Name This is the owner of the Dropbox account the NAS is configured to use.

Email This is the e-mail address of the owner of the Dropbox account the NAS is configured to

use.

Logout This displays after the NAS connects to Dropbox. Click Logout to stop syncing your

files with Dropbox and have the NAS log out from your Dropbo x account. Use this to be

able to use the NAS with another Dropbox account. If you only want to stop syncing

your files with Dropbox, you can just clear the Enable Dropbox option and click

Apply.

Capacity This shows how much total storage space is available on the NAS to use for Dropbox as

well as the amounts already in use and still available.

Chapter 20 Dropbox

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

276

20.3 How to Use Dropbox with the NAS

Here is how to use the Drop2NAS and zDownload folders the NAS creates in your Dropbox account.

Using the Drop2NAS Folder

The NAS connects to Dropbox and copies files in the Drop2NAS folder to the NAS’s

admin\Dropbox\FromDropbox folder and empties the Drop2NAS folder. The NAS initiates

connections to the Dropbox server so you do not need to configure rules on a firewall in front of the

NAS to allow access to the NAS. Dropbox is not connecting to the NAS. When you upload files of the

same name to the Drop2NAS folder, the NAS adds a number to the names of the files in the NAS’s

Enable Dropbox Select this to synchronize and back up your Dropbox account. The first time you do this

a Dropbox screen prompts you to log into your Dropbox account.

Then a NAS pop-up opens. Click Get Read y.

Click Allow when the Dropbox screen notifies you of the NAS’s DropNAS application

trying to connect to your Dropbox account.

After the NAS connects to Dropbox, clear the Enable Dropbox option and click Apply

to stop syncing your files with Dropbox without logging out from your Dropbo x account.

Click Logout instead to be able to use the NAS with another Dropbox account.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Ta ble 99 Applications > Dropbox (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 20 Dropbox

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

277

admin\Dropbox\FromDropbox folder in the format of “filename(n).extension”. Here is an example

of the Drop2NAS folder.

Note: Do not delete the NAStoken file as it is needed for your NAS to work with the

Dropbox account.

Figure 168 Dropbox\Drop2NAS

Using the zDownload Folder

The NAS copies *.torrent files in the zDownload folder to the NAS’ s admin\download\torrents folder

and automatically starts downloading them. The NAS adds a suffix to the name of each torrent file

in the Dropbox account’s zDownload folder and keeps updating it to show the job’s state

(downloading, queued, paused, canceled, uploading, finished, error, or retrying). The NAS does not

take any action for folders nor other types of files in the zDownload folder. Here is an example of

torrent files in the zDownload folder.

Figure 169 Dropbox\zDownload

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

278

CHAPTER 21

Using Time Machine with the NAS

21.1 Overview

Time Machine is a backup system provided by Mac OS X. It automatically backs up everything on

your Mac, including pictures, music, videos, documents, applications, and settings. This chapter

helps you to enable Time Machine in OS X to use your NAS as a backup volume.

21.2 Time Machine Screen

Use the Time Machine screen to turn Time Machine support on or off, and designate the share for

Time Machine backups.

Click Applications > Time Machine to open the following screen.

Figure 170 Applications > Time Machine

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

21.3 Using Time Machine

After enabling Time Machine on the NSA, follow the steps below to set up Time Machine on your

Mac to use your NAS for backup.

Table 100 Applications > Time Machine

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Time

Machine Select this to allow Macs to use Time Machine to back up to the NAS. Clear it to turn off

Time Machine support.

Share Select the share the NAS uses t o store Time Machine backups.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Cli ck this to restor e the screen’s last-saved settings.

Chapter 21 Using Time Machine with the NAS

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

279

1Click Apple > System Preferen ces . Then go to System and select Time Machine.

2Turn Time Machine ON. Then click Change Disk.

3Select share01 as the backup disk. Then click Use for Backup.

Chapter 21 Using Time Machine with the NAS

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

280

4When prompted for the username and password of share01, enter the login information for an

existing user account with write access permission on share01 (for information on configuring user

accounts and shares see Section 14.6 on page 155). In this example user1/12345 is used. Then

click Connect.

5Time Machine starts backing up files to share01 after 120 seconds. If you want to backup

immediately, click Time Machine icon and select Back Up Now.

6The screen shows the status of the backup once the process begins.

7To stop the backup process, click the Time Machine icon and select Stop Backing Up. Then turn

Time Machine OFF.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

281

CHAPTER 22

Users

22.1 Overview

This chapter introduces the Users screens of the NAS. Use the Users screens to create and

manage administrator and user accounts.

Administrators can:

• Configure and manage the NAS.

• Create volumes, shares, and user accounts.

• Assign individual users specific access rights for specific shares.

Users are people who have access rights to the NAS and can store files there for later retrieval. A

user can:

• Manage shares that he owns.

• Change his own password.

• Access the contents of other shares to which he is given access rights.

22.2 What You Can Do

•Use the main Users screen (Section 22.3 on page 281) to display a list of user accounts created

on the NAS.

•Use the Add User screen (Section 22.3.2 on page 283) to create new user accounts.

•Use the Edit User screen (Section 22.3.2 on page 283) to edit the properties of an existing

account.

•Use the User Info screen (Section 22.4 on page 285) to display the amount of volume space

used by a selected account and the account’s membership in any groups.

22.3 Users Screen

Click Sharing > Users to display the screen shown next.

Use this screen to create and manage accounts for users who can store files on the NAS.

Chapter 22 Users

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

282

Figure 171 Sharing > Users

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 101 Sharing > Users

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add User Click t his to open a screen where you can configure a new user account.

Refer to Secti on 22.3.2 on page 283 to see the sc reen.

Search Click this to display a search field. Type in the name of an account and then click

Search to look up the account you specif ied. Click Clear to close the search function.

Edit User Select an acc o unt and click this to open a screen where you can edit the properties of

the account.

Refer to Secti on 22.3.2 on page 283 to see the sc reen.

Delete Sele c te d

Users Select an account and cli ck this to open a screen where you c a n delete the user

account.

User Info Select an account and click th is to open a screen displa ying the amount of storage space

used by the account. You can also check the account’s membership in any groups.

Refer to Section 22.4 on page 285 to see the screen.

Display Number Click the drop-do wn me nu to s et how ma n y accou nts yo u wa nt to dis pla y in one sc reen .

Go to Page Click the drop-down menu to display and access more user accounts.

Chapter 22 Users

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

283

22.3.1 User Icons

The following table describes the user icons.

22.3.2 Adding or Editing an Account

Use this screen to create or edit a NAS user account with NAS access password.

Click the Add User button in the Users screen to open the following screens. Click the Edit User

button in the screen shown previously to edit an existing account.

Figure 172 Sharing > Users > Add or Edit a User: General Settings

Figure 173 Sharing > Users > Add or Edit a User: Quota (per volume)

User Type This field displays whether the account is an administrator account or a user account.

Username This field displays the username of each account.

Table 101 Sharing > Users (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 102 User Icons

ICON DESCRIPTION

The blue icon is for an administrator account.

The green icon is for a user account.

Chapter 22 Users

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

284

Figure 174 Sharing > Users > Add or Edit a User: General Settings

The following table describes the labels in these screens.

22.3.3 Usernames

Enter a username from one to 32 characters. The first character must be alphabetical (case

insensitive, [A-Z a-z]); numeric characters are not allowed as the first character.

The username can only contain the following characters:

Table 103 Users > Add or Edit a User

LABEL DESCRIPTION

General Settings Click this to configure the user’s user name and password.

Username Type a name from 1 to 32 single-byte (no Chinese characters allowed for example)

ASCII characters. See Section 22.3.3 on page 284 for more details on usernames.

New Password Create a password associated with this user. You can type from one to 14 single-

byte (no Chinese characters allowed for example) ASCII characters.

Password (Confirm) You must type the exact same passwo rd that you just typed in the above field.

Account Type Select Administrator to give the account full configuration and management

access to the NAS.

Select User to give the account basic access rights to the NAS and allow the user to

manage his own shares, change his own password, and access the contents of other

shares to which he is given access rights.

Quota (per volume) Click this to configur e which vo lume the user can use and the allowed storage space.

Volume Name Select the volume in which you want the user’s files to be stored.

Quota (per volume) Enter how much space (in megabytes) you want to allow for the user to store files.

Group Membership Click this to configure to which groups on the NAS the user belongs.

Available Group(s) This field lists the groups created on the NAS to which the selected account does not

belong.

Group Membership Th is field li sts the groups that the selected account be longs to.

Add Selected

Group(s) Select a group from the Available Groups list and click this to add the account to

that group.

Remove Selected

Group(s) Select a group from the Group Membership list and clic k this to remove the

account from that group.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 22 Users

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

285

• Alphanumeric A-z 0-9. Unicode usernames are supported with CIFS logins, but not FTP or web

configurator logins.

•Spaces

• _ [underscores]

•. [periods]

•- [dashes]

Other limitations on usernames are:

• All leading and trailing spaces are removed automatically.

• Multiple spaces within names are converted to a single space.

• Usernames are case insensitive. The username cannot be the same (no matter the letter case) as

an existing user. For example, if a user ex is ts with the name 'BOB', you cannot create a user

named 'bob'. If you enter a user 'bob' but use 'BOB' when connecting via CIFS or FTP, it will use

the account settings used for 'bob'.

• The username cannot be the same as a system username such as ANONYMOUS-FTP nor be the

same as an existing user. Other reserved usernames that are not allowed are:

•bin

•daemon

•ftp

• anonymous-ftp

• anonymous

• nobody

• root

•pc-guest

•admin

• password

22.4 Displaying User Info

Use this screen to display a user’s information.

In the Users screen, select an account and click User Info to open the following screen.

Chapter 22 Users

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

286

Figure 175 Sharing > Users > User Info

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 104 Sharing > Users > User Info

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Username This field displays the selected username.

Space Usage Click this to display the amount of volume space used by the selected account.

Group List Click this to display the selected user’s group membership.

Volume Name This field displays the volume(s) created on the NAS.

Used Space This field di splays how much s torage space the selected acc ount is currentl y using. This onl y

applies for files that the user saved onto the NAS while logged in with that username.

Group Name This shows when you click the Group List tab.

This displays the list of groups to which the s elected user be longs.

OK Click this to close the current screen.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

287

CHAPTER 23

Groups

23.1 Overview

This chapter introduces the Groups screens. Use the Groups screens to create and manage

groups. You can assign users to groups and grant individual groups access rights to specific shares.

23.2 What You Can Do

•Use the main Groups screen (Section 23.3 on page 287) to display and manage a list of groups

created on the NAS.

•Use the Add Group screen (Section 23.3.1 on page 288) to create new groups.

•Use the Edit Group screen (Section 23.3.1 on page 288) to edit the properties of an existing

group.

23.3 Groups Screen

Use this screen to create and manage groups.

Click Sharing > Groups to display the screen shown next.

Figure 176 Sharing > Groups

Chapter 23 Groups

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

288

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

23.3.1 Adding or Editing a Group

Use this screen to create or edit a NAS group.

Click the Add Group button in the Groups screen to open the following screen. Click the Edit

Group button in the screen shown previously to edit an existing group.

Table 105 Sharing > Groups

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Group Click this to open a screen where you can configure a new group.

Search Click this to display a search field. Type the name of a group and then click

Search to look up the group you specified. Click Clear to close the search

function.

Edit Group Select a group and click this t o open a screen where you c an edit the properties of

the selected group.

Delete Selected Group(s) Select a group and click this to open a screen where you can delete the group.

Display Number Click the drop-down menu to set how many groups you want to display in one

screen.

Go to Page Click the drop-down menu to select a page number. Jump to a different page to

display and access more groups.

Status This field displays the group icon.

Group Name This field displays the group names created on the NAS.

Chapter 23 Groups

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

289

Figure 177 Sharing > Groups > Add or Edit a Group

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

23.3.2 Group Names

Enter a group name from 1 to 32 characters. The first character must be alphabetical (case

insensitive, [A-Z a-z]); numeric characters are not allowed as the first character.

The group name can only contain the following characters:

• Alphanumeric A-z 0-9. Unicode usernames are supported with CIFS logins, but not FTP or web

configurator logins.

•Spaces

• _ [underscores]

•. [periods]

•- [dashes]

Other limitations on group names are:

• All leading and trailing spaces are removed automatically.

• Multiple spaces within names are converted to a single space.

Table 106 Sharing > Groups > Add or Edit a Group

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Group Name Type a name from 1 to 32 sing le-byte (no Chinese characters allowed for

example) ASCII characters. See Section 23.3.2 on page 289 for more details on

group names.

Group Membership Use this field to assign group membership to individual users.

Available User(s) This field lists the user accounts created on the NAS that are not members of the

current group.

Group Membership Th is field lists the user accounts added to the group.

Add Selected User(s) Select a user ac c oun t from the Available Users list and click this to add the

account to the group.

Remove Selected

User(s) Select a user account from the Group Membership list and click this to remove

the account from the group.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 23 Groups

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

290

• Group names are case insensitive. The group name cannot be the same (no matter the letter

case) as an existing group. For example, if a group exists with the name 'FAMILY', you cannot

create a group named 'family'.

• The group name cannot be the same as a system group name such as EVERYONE nor be the

same as an existing group. Other reserved groups names that are not allowed are:

• nobody

• root

•everyone

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

291

CHAPTER 24

24.1 Overview

A share is a set of access permissions mapped to a specific folder on a volume. It is equivalent to

the Windows concept of a shared folder. You can map a share to a network drive for easy and

familiar file transfer for Windows users.

24.2 What You Can Do

•Use the Shares screen (Section 24.3 on page 291) to navigate a list of shares created on the

NAS.

•Use the Add Shares screen (Section 24.3.1 on page 293) to create additional shares on the

NAS.

•Use the Recycle Bin screen (Section 24.4 on page 295) to configure and clean up the recycle

bins.

•Use the Edit Share screen (Section 24.3.1 on page 293) to edit a share’s properties.

•Use the Share Browser screen (Section 24.5 on page 296) to navigate, add and edit the

contents in a share.

24.3 Shares Screen

Click Sharing > Shares in the navigation panel to open the following screen. This screen lists all

shares created on the NAS.

Figure 178 Sharing > Shares

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

292

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 107 Sharing > Shares

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Add Share Click this to create a new share.

Recycle Bin Click this to configure recycle bins.

Edit Share Select a share and click this to edit the share.

Delete Share Select a share and click this to remove or restrict access to the share.

Share Browser Select a share and click this to browse the share’s contents.

Status This field displays the share icons.

represents a Built-in share on a volume on the internal hard drives.

represents a Predefined or User-Created share on a volume on the internal hard

drives.

represents an Auto or User-Created sh are on a volu me on the external (USB)

devices.

represents a disabled share that no user can access.

represents a missing share. The NAS cannot find the hard disk associated with the

share (the disk may be removed from the NAS for example). You may install the disk

back to the NAS to recover the share, or you may delete the share from the NAS.

Share Type This field displays Built-in for the admin share. If you delete the volume containing this

share, the NAS automatically creates an admin share in the next volume by alphabetical

order.

This field displays Predefined for default shares. Default shares, including music,

video, and photo, always exist as long as there is a volume. If you delete the volume

containing these default shares, the NAS automatically creates these shares in the next

volume by alphabetical order.

This field displays User-created for shares that an administrator has created. You can

delete these sh ares .

This field displays Auto for shares that are automatically created on an external (USB)

device when a user plugs in the device.

Share Name This field displays the share’s names.

Share Path This field displays the share’s file path, for example, volume1/music.

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

293

24.3.1 Adding or Editing Share

Click Add Share to create a new share. In the Shares screen, select a share and click Edit Share

to open the following screen. Use this screen to create or edit a share.

Figure 179 Shares > Add Share (or Edit Share)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Share Owner This is the name of the user account to whic h this share belongs.

Permission Type This field displays the access permission of a share.

Everyone on the network can acc ess a Public share.

Only the share owner can ac cess a Private share.

An Advanced share allows you to assign specific access rights (read-only for example)

to individual users/groups.

Table 107 Sharing > Shares (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 108 Shares > Add Share (or Edit Share)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Share Name Type a share name from 1 to 239 single-byte (no Chinese c har acters allowed for e xample)

ASCII characters. The name cannot be the same as another existing share. See Section

11.2.2 on page 128 for more information on share names.

Volume You should have already created volumes (a single accessibl e storage area with a single

file system) on the NAS. Select the one that contains the folder that you want to share out.

You cannot modify this when editing a share.

Make this share

owned by Select the administrator or user account that can own (manage) this share. The share

owner controls access rights to the share.

Enable this share Click this to allow access to this share.

Enable Recycle

Bin Click this to activate the recycle bin. When you delete a file from this share, a recycle

folder is created to store the deleted item.

Publish this share

to Media Server This option is available only when you enable the Media Server (Section 17.5 on page

216).

Select this option to have the NAS mak e media file s in this share avail able to media clients

and throug h the Pl ayz one screen s. When you p ubli sh a shar e, y ou ca n also se lec t whet her

or not to publish music tracks, photos, and videos. The media clients do not have to use a

password to play the shares you publish.

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

294

24.3.2 Configuring Advanced Share Access

In the Sharing > Shares > Add Share or Edit Sh are screen, select Advanced from the Share

Access drop-down list. Click Edit to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure share

access rights for individual users and groups.

Figure 180 Sharing > Shares > Add Share (or Edit Share) > Advanced

Publish this share

to Web This option is available when you enable the Web Publish (Section 17.8 on page 230).

Select this option to let peo p le use a web browser to access this share’s files without

logging into the Web Configurator.

Share Access Assign access ri ghts (full, read only or deny) to users or groups. If you publish the share

to the media server or the web, all users will have at least read-only access to the share,

regardless of what you configure here.

Keep it private to owner means only the share owner (selected above) can access the

share.

Make it Public means every user (in cluding people who do not have accounts on the

NAS) can access the share.

Advanced allows you to assign specific access rights (full, read only or deny) to individual

users/groups.

Edit This button is available only when you select Advanced share access. Click this to

configure advanced share access rights.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Table 108 Shares > Add Share (or Edit Share) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

295

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

24.3.3 Public and ANONYMOUS Share Access Rights

If you make a share public, users do not need to log in.

With ANONYMOUS FTP, you must enter either 'anonymous' or 'ftp' as the username. Any other

name is considered a username, so must be valid and have a corresponding correct password.

24.4 Recycle Bin Configuration Screen

Use this screen to periodically clean up items in all recycle bins.

24.4.1 Recycle Bins

Recy cle bins in the NAS help users recover accidentally deleted files or folders in the shares. When

you delete an item, a recycle folder is created within the share to hold the deleted item.

Every share can have its own recycle folder. You must enable the recycle-bin function to recycle

deleted items. You can configure this setting when you add or edit a share. See Section 24.4.2 on

page 296 for details on activating the recycle bin in a share.

Later if you want to retrieve a deleted item, you can locate the item in the recycle folder. You may

move or copy the deleted item to another share.

Table 109 Sharing > Shares > Add Share (or Edit Share) > Advanced

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Available Users/Groups This field lists the users/groups to which you can assign access rights.

Authority Use this field to assign access rights to users/groups.

Full Control gives users/groups full access (read, write and execute) to all files

contained within this share .

Read-Only gives users/groups read-only access (they cannot modify nor

execute) to all files contained within this share.

Deny blocks access (users/groups cannot read, modify, nor execute) to all files

contained within this share .

Among all access rights, Deny has the highest priority. For example, User A

belongs to Group 1. You assign User A full access rights to the Music sh are but

deny access rights to Group 1. Then User A cannot access the Music share.

Note: If you deny access to all users, no-one can use the share, not even the

administrator.

Click an arrow button to move users/groups between the left and right fields. Use

the arrow buttons to assign access rights to users/groups.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

296

24.4.2 Configuring Recycle Bins

In the Sharing > Shares screen, click Recycle Bin to open the foll owing screen.

Figure 181 Sharing > Shares > Recycle Bin

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

24.5 Share Browser Screen

Use this screen to create folders, upload files, and edit files within the share.

Figure 182 Sharing > Shares > Share Browser

Ta ble 110 Sharing > Shares > Recycle Bin

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Clean Recycle Bin every N

days Specify how often you w ant to clear the contents in all recycle bins. The specified

days correspond to how long a file has been stored in a recycle bin. For example,

if you set the interval to be 3 days, recycle bins will clean up items deleted or not

accessed for 3 days.

Note: Cleaning up recycle bins permanently removes the files from the NAS.

Empty All Recycle Bins

Now Click this to immediately remove contents from all recycle bins.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

297

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 111 Sharing > Shares > Share Browser

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Create Folde r Type a folder name and click Apply to make a new folder. The name can be 1 to 239 single-

byte (no Chinese characters allowed for example) ASCII characters. The name ca nnot be

the same as another existing folder in the same path. See Section 11.2.2 on page 128 for

more information on folder names.

Upload Click this to add files to the shar e. Use Browse to locate a file and click Apply to upload the

file. Note that the size of each file should be less than 2 GB.

Renam e Select a folder or file and click this to op en a screen. Enter the name you want and click OK

to make the changes.

Note: When you change a file name, make sure you keep the file extension

Delete Select a file/folder from the list and click this to open a warning screen. Click Yes to delete

the file/folder, or click No to close the screen.

Move Select a file/folder from the list and click this to relocate the file/folder to another share.

Copy Select a file/folder from the list and click this to make a duplicate of the file/folder to

another share.

Current

location This is the name of the share and folder path that you are in.

Type The icon in this column identifies the entry as a folder or a file. Click a music or video file’s

play icon to play the file.

The folder with an arrow pointing up is for the link that takes you to the next higher layer in

the share’s folder tree.

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

298

24.5.1 Moving or Copying Files

Use this screen to move or copy files to another share.

In the Share Browser screen, select a file or folder and click Move or Copy to open the following

screen.

Figure 183 Sharing > Shares > Share Browser > Move (or Copy)

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Name This section lists the share’s existing folders or files. Click to the right of the file/folder name

to select the file/folder. You can also click the folder’s name to navigate to a sub-folder

within the folder.

Size This field displays size of the file.

Modified Date This field displays a file’s latest modification date.

Close Click this to cl ose the screen.

Table 111 Sharing > Shares > Share Browser (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Ta ble 112 Sharing > Shares > Share Browser > Move (or Copy)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Shares Select the destination share from the drop-down list.

Path This field displays the share folder’s path. You can use Browse to find or create a folder on

the NAS or type the location of the folder using forward slashes as branch separators.

Browse Click this to open the following screen and navigate to the location of the file/folder.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Folder Name - Enter a new folder name and click to create it.

•Type - This identifies the item as a folder or file.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Select a folder. If you don’t select a folder, a forward slash (/) displays in the Path field. All

contents within the specified share are automatically selected.

Click Apply to save your settings and Cancel to close the screen.

Chapter 24 Shares

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

299

Yes Click this to move or copy the file/folder to the designated share.

Close Click this to return to the Share Br ow ser screen.

Ta ble 112 Sharing > Shares > Share Browser > Move (or Copy) (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

300

CHAPTER 25

WebDAV

25.1 Overview

The WebDAV HTTP extension lets users edit and manage files stored on remote servers. The NAS’s

WebDAV service allows client programs that support WebDAV, such as NetDrive and BitKinex on

Windows, Mac OS Finder, and Linux file browsers remotely edit and manage files stored on the NAS.

25.2 WebDAV Screen

Use the WebDAV screen to allow remote users to use client programs that support WebDAV to edit

and manage files stored on the NAS.

Click Sharing > WebDAV to open the following screen.

Figure 184 Sharing > WebDAV

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 113 Sharin g > We bDAV

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable WebDAV

(http/Https) Select this to allow remote users to work with files stored on the NAS. Edit the access

privileges in Sharing > Shares.

Https is for secure WebDAV connections to the NAS.

Example When you enable WebDAV the screen displays an exampl e of the URL users would use

to use WebDAV to connect to the NAS where “sharename” re presents a share that the

user can access. Use HTTPS for secure WebDAV connections t o the NAS.

Enable anonymous

WebDAV Select this to allow rem ote users to use WebDAV to access all shares on the NAS

without a login name or password.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to discard any unsaved changes and restore previously saved settings.

Chapter 25 WebDAV

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

301

25.3 How to Use NetDrive with the NAS

Here is an example of how to use the NetDriv e WebDA V clien t with the NAS.

1Download and install NetDrive.

2Click Add Drive and use the URL for WebDAV connections to the NAS to add a drive entry for

accessing the NAS.

Figure 185 NetDrive Example

3Name the drive and specify the URL of the share to access. Select SSL if the NAS forces HTTPs use.

Specify your user name and password for accessing the share on the NAS.

Figure 186 NetDrive Add Drive

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

302

CHAPTER 26

Maintenance Screens

26.1 Overview

This chapter discusses the Maintenance screens. Th e Maintenance screens allow you to manage

system configurations.

26.2 What You Can Do

•Use the Power screen (Section 26.3 on page 302) to configure power settings for the NAS,

including power saving, UPS, power on/off after power failure, power on/off schedule, and Wake

on LAN.

•Use the Log screen (Section 26.4 on page 306) to check the system’s logs.

•Use the Configuration screen (Sec t ion 26.5 on page 310) to backup or restore the NAS

configuration file.

•Use the SSL screen (Section 26.6 on page 311) to configure HT TPS and the NAS’ s S SL certificate.

•Use the Shutdown screen (Section 26.7 on page 313) to restart or shut down your NAS.

•Use the Unpair myZyXELcloud screen (Section 26.8 on page 314) to remove the pairing

between the NAS and the myZyXELcloud account.

26.3 Power Screen

Use this screen to manage power settings for the NAS.

Click Maintenance > Power to display the following screen.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

303

Figure 187 Maintenance > Power

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 114 Maintenance > Power

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Power Management

Turn off hard

disk(s) Enter the number of minutes to wait when the NAS is idle before spinning the hard disks

down to sleep (hibernation). The default time is 15 minutes.

Enable Sleeping

HDD LED

Blinking

Select this to ha ve the HDD LED blink slowly when th e hard di sk is sl ee pin g (h ibe rnat in g).

Clear this to have the HDD LED stay on when the hard disk is sleeping.

Minimum UPS Capacity

Minimum UPS

Capacity When you use an APC Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) with a USB connection to the

NAS, the NAS shuts itself down if the APC UPS’s battery charge gets down to the

percentage you specify in this field. This allows the NAS to shut down properly and avoid

data loss caused by a power failure when the UPS stops supplying power.

A setting around 50% is recommended. A setting close to 100% is not recommended since

it would cause th e N AS t o sh u t down whe n ever the UPS is chargi ng. A se tt in g c los e t o 0 i s

also not recommended since the UPS would not have enough power to allow the NAS to

shutdown properly.

Power On After

Power Failure Select an option to set whether or not the NAS restarts when the power is restored after a

power failure.

Note:

Keep Former

Status Select this option to have the NAS automatically restart only if it was operating when t he

power failed. The NAS remains off if it was already off when the power failed.

Always

Power O n Select this option to keep the NAS operating as much of the time as possible. The NAS

restarts automatically even if it was turned off when the power failed.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

304

26.3.1 Editing the Power Control Schedule Screen

Click Maintenance > Power Management > Edit to open this screen. Use this screen to

configure power control schedules to have the NAS turn on, turn off, or reboot at specified times.

Always

Power O ff Select this option to keep the NAS from automatically restarting when the power is

restored after a power failure. This is a computer’s “traditional” behavior. Select this if you

have other servers such as a domain controller or DNS server that you want to start or

check after a power failure before the NAS turns on.

Power On/Off Schedule

Enable Power

Control Schedule Select this option to have the NAS turn itself off and on or reboot according to the

schedules you configur ed.

Click Edit to go to the screen where you can configure the power control schedules.

Refer to Section 26.3.1 on page 304 for this screen.

Note:

Enable Wake On

LAN Enable Wake On LAN to be able to turn on the NAS through its wired Ethernet connection.

You must have a computer or router on your LAN that supports sending Wake On LAN

“magic packets” to turn on the NAS.

To use W ake On LAN from a computer on your LA N, install a progr am such as W ake On LAN

EX or another Wake On LAN program that supports sending magic packets.

You can use W ake On LAN from a remote location if the router in front of the NAS supports

sending magic packets.

Use the NAS’s power button or the Web Configurator’s Maintenance > Shutdown menu

to turn off the NAS.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Reset Click this to restore previously saved settings.

Ta ble 114 Maintenance > Power (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

305

Figure 188 Maintenance > Power Management > Edit

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Ta ble 115 Maintenance > Power Management > Edit

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Power Control

Schedule List This table lists the power on, power off, and reboot schedules. For example, you could

have one schedule to turn the NAS on every morning, at 8:00, another schedule to turn it

off every evening at 18:00, and a thir d schedule to have it reboot every Friday at 14:00.

Click a column’s heading cell to sort the schedule s by that column’s criteria. Click the

heading cell again to reverse the sort order.

Type This field displays whether the power control schedule has the NAS turn on, turn off, or

reboot.

Frequency This field shows how often (monthly, weekly, or dail y) the NAS is to apply this power

control sched u le .

Execute Time This field shows when the NAS is to use this power control schedule (when the NAS is to

turn on, turn off, or reboot).

Actions Click the Delete icon to remove a power control schedule from the list.

Add Power

Control Schedule Use this part of the screen to configure power on, power off, and reboot times.

Type Select whether this power control schedule has the NAS turn on, turn off, or reboot.

Frequency Select whether the NAS i s to apply this power control sche dule entry on a mont hly, weekly,

or daily basis.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

306

26.4 Log Screen

Click Maintenance > Log to open the following screen.

Use this screen to display all NAS logs. There are at most 512 entries in the log. Older logs are

removed by the system. You cannot download the log file via FTP or CIFS.

Execute Time

(hh:mm) Enter the time, day, and/or day of the month as appropriate for this power control

schedule entry. Leave more than 10 minutes between the execution times o f the entries.

If the NAS turns off or restarts while a user is transferring files to or from the NAS, the

transfer fails. The user will need to restart the transfer.

The NAS skips a scheduled restart or power off if the execution ti me comes while the NAS

is doing any of the following:

• Resynchronizing a RAID

• Upgrading firmware

• Replacing the configuration file

If the NAS is turned off at the time when a restart or power off is scheduled, the NAS does

not perform the restart or power off.

If the NAS is turned on at the time when a power on is scheduled, the NAS does not

perform the power on.

Use this part of the screen to configure power on, power off, and reboot times.

Please select the

day of the mo nth This is only available if you set the Frequency to Monthly.

Choose the day of each month for the power control schedule entry.

Every how man y

weeks? This is only available if you set the Frequency to Weekly.

Enter the interval between weeks and choose the day of the week for the power control

schedule entry.

Every how man y

days? This is only available if you set the Frequency to Daily.

Enter the interval between days for the power control schedule entry.

Add Click this to add the power control schedule to the list.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Ta ble 115 Maintenance > Power Management > Edit ( c ontinued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

307

Figure 189 Maintenance > Log

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

26.4.1 Report Config Screen

In the Log screen, click Report Config to do the following:

•Use the Email Setting screen (Section 26.4 .2 on page 308) to enable and configure e-mail

alerts from the NAS.

•Use the Report Setting screen (Section 26.4.3 on page 308) to select the type of alerts you

want to receive through e-mail and schedule when the NAS e-mails the alerts.

•Use the Syslog Server Setting screen (Section 26.4.4 on page 309) to enable the syslog server

and select the categories to include in the log report.

Ta ble 116 Maintenance > Log

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Refresh Click this to update the log display.

Purge all Logs Click this to erase all logs from the NAS.

Report Config Click this to open a screen where you can configure email alerts for logs. Refer to Section

26.4.1 on page 307 to see the screens for this.

Display The screen always shows all logs by default. Choose a specific log category to view logs for

just that category.

# This i s the log entry’s number in the list according to the currently selected sort order.

Time This shows the date and time the log was created. Click the top of the column to sort by

oldest or newest.

Class This displ ays the log category; see Table 124 on page 314for details.

Severity This displays how serious the log is rated by the NAS. See Table 125 on page 315for more

information.

Message This displays a description of the log. Click the top of the column to sort by alphabetical or

reverse alphabetical order.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

308

26.4.2 Email Setting

You can enable and configure e-mail alerts from the NAS. In the Report Config screen, click the

Email Setting tab to open the following screen.

Figure 190 Maintenance > Log > Report Config: Email Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

26.4.3 Report Setting

You can have the NAS email you alerts and reports. In the Report Config screen, click the Report

Setting tab to open the following screen.

Ta ble 117 Maintenance > Log > Report Config: Email Setting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Log Email Click this to have the NAS e-mail lo g alerts to your e- mail account .

Email To Enter the e-mail address where you want to receive the log alerts.

Email From Enter the e-mail address the NAS uses in the From field of the e-mail header for its log

alerts.

Email Server Enter the e-mail server address the NAS uses to send e-mail alerts,

Email Format Select the e-mail format you want the NAS to use in its e-mail alerts.

Use SMTP

Authentication Click this if the e-mail server you want the NAS to use for its e-mail alerts requires a

username and password.

User Enter the username for the e-mail server.

Password Enter the password for the e-mail server.

Password

(Confirm) Re-enter the password to confirm it.

After apply settings,

send a test email Click this to have the NAS send a test e-mail to the settings you have entered.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

309

Figure 191 Maintenance > Log > Report Config: Report Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

26.4.4 Syslog Server Setting

You can enable the syslog server and select the categories to include in the log report. In the

Report Config screen, click the Syslog Server Setting tab to open the following screen.

Ta ble 118 Maintenance > Log > Report Config: Report Se tting

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Email Alert Select the Enable Email Log check box to have the NAS send an alert email to the

configured email address whenever the NAS generates a c ritical severity log.

Report Time Select how often (Weekly, Daily or Hourly), the day of the week (for weekly reports), and

the time (hour:minutes) the NAS sends a report email.

Enable Email

Log Select the check box to have the NAS email reports of all logs the NAS generates to the

configured email address.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

310

Figure 192 Maintenance > Log > Report Config: Syslog Server Setting

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

26.5 Configuration Screen

Click Maintenance > Configuration to open the following screen. Use this screen to backup or

restore the NAS configuration settings.

Figure 193 Maintenance > Configuration

Ta ble 119 Maintenance > Log > Report Config: Syslo g Server Settin g

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Enable Syslog

Server Check this to enable syslog server.

Server Address Enter the syslog server address you want the NAS to use for its log alerts.

In the table below, check the type of log aler ts you want to re ceive in your e- mail. Select All Log to include all

types of log alerts.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

311

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

26.6 SSL Certification

Click Maintenance > SSL to open this screen, where you can turn on HTTPS, create a public key

certificate, or upload a public key certificate that was issued by a known certificate authority.

Figure 194 Maintenance > SSL

Table 120 Maintenance > Configuration

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Backup Current Configuration Settings

Backup Click this to save the current configuration of the NAS to your computer. A pop-up

screen appears asking you to confirm. Click OK to con tinue or Cancel to quit.

Restore Configuration When you restore a file configuration, the NAS checks the volumes/share paths on

the NAS and the configuration file.

If the volume exists but th e share path is mi ssing in the NAS, the NAS automa tically

creates this share path.

If the volume does not exist on th e NAS, the Status of the share will show “missing

share icon” in Shares screen (see Table 107 on page 292).

Browse Click this to locate a previously-saved configuration file.

Restore Click this to load the previously-saved configuration file to the NAS. This replaces

your current NAS configuration settings wi th the settings in the previously-saved

configuration file .

A pop-up screen appears asking you to confirm. Click OK to continue or Cancel to

quit.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

312

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

26.6.1 Modifying or Creating a Certificate

When you select the Edit a self-signed CA certificate option, then click the Edit button, a screen

opens to allow you to make adjustments to the NAS’s public key certificate.

The screen is also the same for the Create a certificate authorized by other CA option.

Figure 195 Maintenance > SSL > Create or Edit a Certificate

Table 121 Maintenance > SSL

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Install System Default CA Click Download button to save a copy of the NAS’s public key certificate to your

local computer. This is useful for installing the certificate without having to

connect to th e NAS, or for send ing by email to other users fo r them to install prior

to logging into the NAS for the first time. After saving the certificate to your

computer, double-click it to install it.

Note: Each web browser handles certificate installation differently.

Modify the Existing

Certificate Select Edit a self-signed CA certific ate, then follow the on-screen instructions

for creating a public key certificate signed by the NAS as the local certificate

authority.

Note: Use certificates created and signed by the NAS if the device is not open to

external access.

Select Create a certificate authorized by other CA, th en fo ll ow the o n-sc reen

instructions to install a certificate that has been authorized by a third-party

certificate authority.

Note: Use this method if the device is open to external access, such as allowing

users to connect through the Internet using FTP over TLS or HTTPs.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

313

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

26.7 Shutdown Screen

Use this screen to turn off the NAS or perform a software restart. A software restart is faster than

turning the NAS off and then turning it on again. Before shutting down or restarting, check the

System Status > Active Sessions screen to make sure that no one is logged into the NAS or

transferring files to or from the NAS.

Click Maintenance > Shutdown to open the following screen.

Figure 196 Maintenance > Shutdown

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

When you click the Restart button a pop-up screen will appear asking you to confirm. Click OK to

continue or Cancel to quit the restart.

Table 122 Maintenance > SSL > Create or Edit a Certificate

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Common Name This name describes the certificate’s origin, either in the form of an IP address or a

domain name.

Host IP Address Select this option and enter the NAS’s IP address if you want to use this for the

common name.

Host Domain Name Select this option and enter the NAS’s domain name if you want to use this for the

common name

Organizational Unit

(Optional) Enter this nam e of the organi zation al unit which owns or maintains the NAS. This is

an optional field.

Organization (Optional) Enter this name of the organization or company which owns or maintains the NAS.

This is an optional field.

Country (Optional) Enter this name of the country in which the NAS is located. This is an optional field.

K ey Type Select the certifi cate’s key type, either RSA or DSA. RS A is a public-k ey encry ption

and digital signature algorithm, while DSA is only a digital signature algorithm.

Key Length Select the encryption key length. The longer the key, the better the encryption

security. The only drawback to having a long key is that the file encrypted with it

swells in size as well.

Apply Click this to save your changes.

Cancel Click this to discard changes and close the window.

Table 123 Maintenance > Shutdown

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Restart Click this to have the device perform a software restart.

Shutdown Click this to shut down the system and restart it again later.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

314

Figure 197 Maintenance > Shutdown > Confirm Restart

When you click the Shutdown button a pop-up screen will appear asking you to confirm. Click OK

to continue or Cancel to quit the shutdown.

Figure 198 Maintenance > Shutdown > Confirm Shutdown

26.8 Unpair myZyXELcloud Screen

Figure 199 Use this screen to remove the pairing between the NAS and the myZyXELcloud account

if you want to pair the NAS with a different myZyXELcloud account. You have to pair the NAS

and your myZyXELcloud account before performing the unpair. Click Maintenance > Unpair

myZyXELcloud to open the following screen, and click Unpair.

26.9 Technical Reference

This section provides technical background information on the topics discussed in this chapter.

26.9.1 Log Classes

The following table shows information on log classes.

Table 124 Log Classes

LOG

CATEGORY DESCRIPTION

Users This log class shows information on user access to the NAS.

Shares This log class shows information on shares being created or deleted.

Services This log class shows information on the o p eration of the NAS’s built-in services.

System This log class shows all other system related m essages.

Network This log class shows information on network config uration, setting changes and so on.

Storage This log class shows information on the NAS’s internal and external storage activities.

Backup This log class shows information on all backup-related activities .

Auto Upload This log class shows inform ation on automa tic uploads done by the NAS.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

315

26.9.2 Log Severity Levels

The following table shows information on log severity levels. Levels range from 0 to 6 with 0 being

the most severe level log and 6 being an informational log only. Log levels are not displayed in the

logs and are for your reference only.

26.9.3 Log Messages

Here are some example log messages.

Table 125 Log Severity Levels

LEVEL DESCRIPTION

0Emergency

1Alert

2Critical

3 Error

4 Warning

5Notice

6Info

Table 126 Log Messages

CLASS SEVERITY MESSAGE

Auto upload INFO %s is queued.

Auto upload INFO %s uploaded (Flickr or YouTube Upload).

Auto upload WARNING error uploading "%s" (%s): %s

Auto upload INFO %s will not be uploaded to %s for there is already a duplicate file.

Auto upload INFO Failed to upload %s to %s (FTP Upload) : %s

Auto upload INFO Successfully upload %s to %s (FTP Upload)

Copy/Sync Button ERROR [USB %s] Backup Folder Does Not Exist.

Copy/Sync Button ERROR [USB %s] Target Folder Does Not Exist.

Copy/Sync Button ERROR [USB Sync] Failed at %s: It is a Folder in Internal Volume. But It is not a

Folder in USB.

Copy/Sync Button ERROR [USB Sync] Failed at %s: It is a Folder in USB. But It is not a Folder in

Internal Volume.

Copy/Sync Button ERROR [USB Sync] Failed at File %s.

Copy/Sync Button ERROR [USB Sync] Sync Failed at Folder %s.

Copy/Sync Button ERROR Modify COPY/SYNC Button Configuration: %s

Copy/Sync Button ERROR Please Change Your Folder Name. Invalid Path: %s

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Copying %s from Internal Volume to Backup Folder.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Copying %s from Internal Volume to USB.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Copying %s from USB to Backup Folder.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Copying %s from USB to Internal Volume.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Deleting %s from Internal Volume.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Deleting %s from USB.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Deleting %s from USB Recursively.

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

316

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Finished. Elapsed Time %s Seconds.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Moving %s from Internal Volume to Backup Folder.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Moving %s from USB to Backup Folder

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Skip %s: File not Exist

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Skip %s: Not a Regular File.

Copy/Sync Button INFO [USB Sync] Start Pre-Processing: Generating File Lists.

Copy/Sync Button NOTICE [USB Sync] Start Copying Files.

Download Service ERROR Download service cannot find a volume

Download Service ERROR Download service failed to find ipfilter.dat

Download Service INFO Download service add a URL download job %s

Download Service INFO Download service delete %s by user

Download Service INFO Download service download %s error (0x%08x)

Download Service INFO Download service download %s finished in %s

Download Service INFO Download service found a new torrent file %s

Download Service INFO Download service initialized

Download Service INFO Download service pause %s by user

Download Service INFO Download service set %s to %s priority by user

Download Servi ce INF O Download service set de fault download location to %s

Download Service INFO Download service set max P2P download rate to %d KB/s by user

Download Service INFO Download service set max P2P upload rate to %d KB/s by user

Download Service INFO Download service set max download slot to %d

Download Service INFO Down lo a d service set seeding time to %d minutes

Download Service INFO Download service set TCP port to %d and UDP port to %d

Download Service INFO Download service set torrent monitor location to %s

Download Service INFO Download service start to download %s

Download Service INFO Download service stopped

Download Service INFO Download service suspend %s because of no data income detected or to

limit max download slot

Download Service INFO Download service add comment %s to %s by user

Download Service INFO Download service set min upload/download ratio to %d%

Download Service INFO Download service set max seed slot to %d

Download Service INFO Download s ervice start loading ipfilter.dat

Download Service INFO Download service clear all ipfilter rules

Download Service INFO Download service blocked peer removed from peer list

Download Service INFO Download service disconnected blocked peer

Download Service INFO Download service incoming connection blocked by IP filter

Download Service INFO Download service peer from tracker blocked by IP filter

Download Service I NFO Download service abort loading ipfilter.dat

Download Serv ice INFO Download service will update ipfilter.dat from %s after %d day(s)

Download Service INFO Download service added %d rules from ipfilter.dat

Download Service INFO Download service detected invalid ip range %s in ipfilter.dat

Table 126 Log Messages (continued)

CLASS SEVERITY MESSAGE

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

317

Download Serv ice WARNING Download service default location does not ex ist. Load default

Download Service WARNING Download service default torrent location does not exist. Load default

Groups NOTICE Add new group %s.

Groups NOTICE Delete group %s.

Network INFO DyDNS: Start Success

Network INFO DyDNS: Stop Success

Network NOTICE %s is active because of changing Port Group. Enable DHCP client.

Network NOTICE %s is inactive because of changing Port Group. Disable DHCP client.

Network NOTICE %s MTU > (%s MTU - 8), %s may not work correctly.

Network NOTICE (%s MTU - 8) < %s MTU, %s may not work correctly.

Network NOTICE Add interface %s.

Network NOTICE Because %s link down. Default route will not apply until %s link up.

Network NOTICE Because base interface %s will be disabled. Interface %s is disabled now.,

base_ud_iface

Network NOTICE Network Config setting is changed

Network NOTICE Interface %s was disabled.

Network NOTICE Interface %s was enabled.

Network NOTICE Port Group on %s is changed. Renew DHCP client.

Network NOTICE Account pppoe was changed

Network NOTICE Add account pppoe

Network NOTICE ADD interface ppp0

Network NOTICE Interface ppp0 will reapply because Device-Ha become active status.

Network NOTICE Interface ppp0 will reapply because Device-Ha is not running.

Network NOTICE Network port is disabled

Network NOTICE Network port is enabled

Network ERROR DyDNS: Start Error

Network ERROR DyDNS: Stop Error

Services INFO HTTP management port has changed to %s

Services INFO Clock timezone is set to GMT%s

Services INFO Clock timezone is set to default

Services INFO Clock daylight saving is enabled

Services INFO Clock daylight saving is disabled

Services INFO Clock has disable daylight saving

Services INFO MyClock has enable daylight saving

Services INFO MyClock has set time zone to %s

Services INFO MyClock has set timezone to default

Services INFO The date and time are updated from NTP server.

Services INFO The date and time are updated manually.

Services INFO The time is updated manually.

Services NOTICE FTP server stops

Services NOTICE FTP server starts

Table 126 Log Messages (continued)

CLASS SEVERITY MESSAGE

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

318

Services NOTICE MyClock has changed daylight saving interval

Services NOTICE MyClock has disabled daylight saving interval

Services NOTICE NTP server has s et to '%s'

Services NOTICE NTP server has set to nul l

Services NOTICE The NTP service is disable d.

Services NOTICE The NTP service is enabled.

Services WARNING Reaching Maximum Allowed Rules

Services WARNING Rule is empty

Services WARNING The Rule Does Not Exist

Shares INFO Expire recycle-bin finish for share %s, process time: %s seconds, remove

%s file (%s bytes)

Shares NOTICE Add new disabled share %s for unshared folder: %s in volume: %s.

Shares NOTICE Add new share %s.

Shares NOTICE Delete share %s.

Shares NOTICE Purge all files in recycle-bin folder in share: %s.

Shares NOTICE Recycle-bin disabled. Remove recycle-bin folder i n share: %s.

Storage ERROR Eject External Disk (%s): FAILED

Storage INFO Eject External Disk (%s): SUCCESS

Storage ERROR Cancel External Volume Scan: FAILED

Storage ERROR Cannot Unmount V olume and RAID . S ystem Busy Using Volume and RAID:

Please Reboot and Try Again

Storage ERROR Create External Normal Volume [%s] (%s): FAILED

Storage ERROR Rename External Volume to [%s]: FAILED

Storage ERROR Scan External Volume: FAILED

Storage INFO Cancel External Volume Scan: SUCCESS

Storage INFO Create External Normal V ol ume [%s] (%s): SUCCESS

Storage INFO Rename External Volume to [%s]: SUCCESS

Storage INFO Scan External Volume: SUCCESS

storage Info Create raidType [Volume1]: SUCCESS

storage error Create raidType [Volume1]: FAILED

storage Info Create raidType [Disk group 1]: SUCCESS

storage error Create raidType [Disk group 1]: FAILED

storage Info Create Internal Volume [Volume1] (Size=512MB): SUCCESS

storage error Create Internal Volume [Volume1] (Size=512MB): FAILED

storage Info Delete Volume [Volume1] SUCCESS

storage error Delete Volume [Volume1] FAILED

storage Info Delete Disk Group [ Disk Group 1] SUCCESS

storage error Delete Disk Group [ Disk Group 1] FAILED

storage Info initialize Repair Degraded Raid [Volume1]: SUCCESS

storage e rror init ialize Repair Degraded Raid [Volume1] : FAILED

storage Info initialize Repair Degraded Raid [ Disk Group 1]: SUCCESS

storage e r ror initialize Repair Degraded Raid [ Disk Group 1]: FAILED

Table 126 Log Messages (continued)

CLASS SEVERITY MESSAGE

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

319

storage Info Add disk1 to Volume1: SUCCESS

storage error Add disk1 to Volume1: FAILED

storage Info Add disk1 to Disk Group 1: SUCCESS

storage error Add disk1 to Disk Group 1: FAILED

storage Info Change Volume1 Raid type to raid5: SUCCESS

storage error Change Volume1 Raid type to raid5: FAILED

storage Info Change Disk Group 1 Raid type to raid5: SUCCESS

storage error Change Disk Group 1 Raid type to raid5: FAILED

storage Info Add Hot-Spare disk1 to Raid [Volume1]: SUCCESS

storage error Add Hot-Spare disk1 to Raid [ Volume1]: FAILED

storage Info Add Hot-Spare disk1 to Raid [ Disk Group 1]: SUCCESS

storage error Add Hot-Spare disk1 to Raid [ Disk Group 1]: FAILED

storage Info Remove Hot-Spare disk1 from Raid [Volume1 ]: FAILED

storage error Remove Hot-Spare disk1 from Raid [Volume1 ]: SUCCESS

storage Info Remove Hot-Spare disk1 from Raid [Disk Group1 ]: FAILED

storage error Remove Hot-Spare disk1 from Raid [Disk Group1 ]: SUCCESS

storage Info Expand Volume [Volume1] : SUCCESS

storage error Expand Volume [Volume1] : FAILED

storage Info Expand Disk Group [Disk Group 1] SUCCESS

storage error Expand Disk Group [Disk Group 1] FAILED

System INFO NTP update failed

System INFO NTP updates successfully from %s

System INFO NTP fails to update from %s

System INFO Device is rebooted by administrator!

System INFO Device is shutdown by administrator!

System NOTICE DNS server is changed.

System NOTICE Hostname is cleared.

System NOTICE Hostname is set to '%s'.

System NOTICE System description is changed.

System NOTICE System description is empty now.

System NOTICE DNS server setting is changed

System NOTICE DNS server address is changed to be given from DHCP server

System NOTICE DNS server address is changed to be assigned by user

System NOTICE Name server is changed.

USB NOTICE An external APC UPS device is plugged/unplugged.

USB NOTICE An external Mass Storage device is plugged/unplugged.

USB NOTICE An external Printer device is plugged/unplugged.

USB NOTICE An external USB hub device is plugged/unplugged.

Users ALERT Failed %s login attempt (incorrect password or inexistent username)

Users INFO User %s has logged in from %s!

Table 126 Log Messages (continued)

CLASS SEVERITY MESSAGE

Chapter 26 Maintenance Screens

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

320

Users INFO User %s has logged out from %s!

Users INFO User %s from %s has been logged out (re-auth timeout)!

Users INFO User %s from %s has been logged out (lease timeou t)!

Users NOTICE Add new user %s by %s from %s.

Users NOTICE User %s password has been changed.

Users NOTICE Delete user %s by %s from %s.

Users NOTICE The user %s from %s has attempted to change the user %s password but

old password verification fail.

Users NOTICE User %s on %u.%u.%u.%u has been denied access from %s

Users NOTICE User %s password has been changed by %s from %s.

Backup/Restore ERROR When que ry remote target [%s]: %s

Backup/Restore INFO Backup job [%s] successfully

Backup/Restore ERROR When back u p [%s]: %s

Backup/Restore ERROR When backu p [%s] , error hap p e ns : %s

Backup/Restore INFO Start to restore backup job [%s].

Backup/Restore INFO Restore backup job [%s] successfully.

Backup/Restore ERROR Restore backup job [%s] failed: %s

Backup/Restore INFO Start to restore backup job [%s] from [% s].

Backup/Restore INFO Restore from [%s] successfully.

Backup/Restore ERROR Restore from [%s] failed: %s

Backup/Restore ERROR When restore [%s]: %s

Backup/Restore ERROR When restore job [%s], error happens: %s

Power Management INFO Job [%s] is triggered by schedule

Power Management INFO Job [%s] is triggered by user

Power Management ERROR Job [%s] is resulted as failed

Power Management INF O Job [%s] is finished successfully

Power Management INFO Job [%s] is pending because other job is running

Power Management INFO Job [%s] is canceled by user

Power Management INFO Restore job [%s] is triggered by user

Power Management INFO [Power On] schedule is triggered.

Power Management INFO [Power Off] schedule is triggered.

Power Management INFO [Reboot] schedule is triggered.

Table 126 Log Messages (continued)

CLASS SEVERITY MESSAGE

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

321

CHAPTER 27

Protect

27.1 Overview

This chapter introduces different ways of protecting data on the NAS and covers the Protect

screens.

27.2 What You Can Do

•Use the Backup screens (Section 27.3 on page 321) to create and customize backup jobs.

•Use the Restore screens (Section 27.4 on page 332) to restore previous backups made with the

NAS.

27.3 Backup Screens

Use this screen to create and customize scheduled backup jobs for your files.

You can have several backup jobs for specific folders and time periods.

Click Protect > Backup to open the following screen.

Table 127 Overview of Protection Methods

SITUATION ACTION

Unexpected NAS behavior after configuration

changes Back up the NAS configuration file before you make

major configuration changes. See Section 27.5 on page

336.

Need to transfer data from your computer to the

NAS after volume(s) have been created Backup your data to a computer or other storage

devices.

Data infected by virus Use anti-virus software on your computer to scan files

before saving the m onto the NAS. Althou gh this may be

slow so you may want to schedule it to occur while no

one is using the NAS.

Use a firewall with anti-virus capability on your network.

Hard drive malfunction. Use RAID. See Section 8.6 on page 98 for more

information on RAID.

NAS malfunction

Network down

Natural disaster such as a fire or earthquake occurs

where your NAS is located

Back up data to another NAS or external USB hard

drive. See Sectio n 14.14 on page 191 for an example of

how to back up the NAS to another NAS.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

322

Figure 200 Protect > Backup

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.3.1 Backup: Step 1

Use this screen to specify the job information and back up type.

Click Add Job in the Protect > Backup screen to open the following:

Table 128 Protect > Backup

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Backup

Add Job Click this to create and customize a backup job.

Edit Job Select a backup job in the list and click this to make some changes to it.

Delete Sele c te d

Job(s) Select a backup job in the list and click this to delete it.

Execute Job Now S elect a backup job in the lis t and click this to run the backup job immediatel y.

Rest ore Archive Select a backup job in the list and click thi s to restore the file(s) i ncluded in th at backup

job to the NAS.

This applies to Archive backups only. Refer to Section 27.3.8 on page 330 to see the

screens.

Abort Job Select a backup job in the list and click this to stop the process if the backup job is

currently active.

Activate Job Enable the selected backup job.

Inactivate Job Disable the selected backup job.

Status This shows the current state of the backup job.

•Waiting means the backup job is not active but is scheduled to run at some time.

•Running indicates that the NA S is currently doing the backup job. When the backup

job is running, you can also see a progress bar.

Job Name This identifies the backup job.

Job Description This is a short description of the backup job.

Backup Info This lists down the backup job details: type, source and target. R efer to Section 27. 3.1

on page 322 and Section 27.3.2 on page 323.

Scheduler Info This shows the backup schedule, including the frequency, the time it was last run in

(and wh ether or not it succeeded) , and when it is schedule d to run agai n. The time s use

yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss format.

Refer to Section 27.3.4 on page 326.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

323

Figure 201 Protect > Backup: Step 1

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.3.2 Backup: Step 2

Use this screen to specify where the files you want to backup are located and set where you want

the backup to be stored.

Table 129 Protect > Backup: Step 1

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Job Information

Job Name Enter a name to identi fy the backup job.

Job Description Enter a short description (up to 100 keyboard characters) for the backup job.

Backup Type Choose the backup type the NAS implements for the backup job.

Archive - Th is is a backup of t he source folder in an archive format. Once you backup your

files in the target folder, you cannot access the files indiv idually unless you have the

extracting tool used by the NAS. If there are existing files in the target folder prior to the

NAS’s backup job, the files remain undisturbed. You can also choose between the following

types of archive:

•Full - The NAS does a fresh backup each time. This provides the most protection but

also requires the most st orage space.

•Incremental - The NAS backs up new or modified files from the source folder since the

last backup. The first backup is a full backup. You can also do a full backup after several

incremental backups. Enter how many incremental backups the NAS runs before it

performs a full backup of the source folder. You must keep the latest full backup to be

able to restore the files later.

Synchronization - This does a backup of individual files. If you use this type, you cannot

use the Restore feature of the NAS. You can also choose between the following types of

synchronization:

•Mirror - The NAS delete s all data in the target folder before running the backup. It

makes the target folder identical to the source folder.

•Publish- The NAS does a backup of individual files to the target folder without

overwriting existing files in that folder. It makes a copy of the source files.

Rsync - This synchronizes individual files to another device that supports rsync. Rsync is

open source and provides incremental file transfers. It only sends the differences in the

files through the connection so it brings the remote files into sync very quickly.

• The NAS delete s all data in the tar get folder before running the backup. It makes the

target folder identical to the source folder.

• If you use this type, you cannot use the Restore feature of the NAS.

Next Click this to go to the next step.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

324

Figure 202 Protect > Backup: Step 2

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 130 Protect > Backup: Step 2

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Backup Source Select an (internal) volume and the folders and files to back up using this tree interface.

Click to browse through folders, sub-folders and files.

Click to close a folder in the tree. This is useful if there are many folders or files that

you wish to hide from view.

Click to select a folder or file to back up. This also selects all sub-folders and files.

Click to deselect the folder or file. This also deselects all sub-folders and files.

and appear when there are too many folders/files to display. Click the

arrows to scroll up or down through the folders/files.

for a folder means all sub-folders and files and new folders/files added later will be

backed up.

for a file means the file will be backed up.

(a gra yed out check bo x) for a folder means that only some sub-folders and files under

the folder will be backed up. Newly added folders/files will NOT be backed up.

means the file structure is still loading. Please wait for the folders/files to display.

Note: If you select to back up an entire folder and then de-select a sub-folder or file within

that folder, the main folder icon will turn and any new sub-folders and files added

to this main folder after the initial backup configuration will NOT be backed up.

A list of your select folders and files displays below the selection fields.

Selected Source

Folders This shows the path of the backup source folder you selected.

Backup Target Select the target folder where you want to place your backup.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

325

27.3.3 Backup: Step 3

Use this screen to specify compression, encryption and purge policies for the backup job. This step

is only available if y ou are doing an archiv e backup or a sy nchronization backup to a remote target.

Remote Sel ect this to back up to another device.

For Archives:

The remote device can be another NAS in the network. Fill in the following fields in order

to be able to access it.

• Remote NAS Address

•Username

•Password

• Share Name

Click Test Connection to see if your NAS can communicate with the remote device.

For Synchronization:

The remote device must be another NAS compatible with the NAS’s synchronization

feature. Fill in the following fields in order to be able to access it.

• Remote NAS Address

• Username (always “admin”)

• Remote Admin’s Password

Click Show target content to connect to the remote NAS so you can select the target

share for the backup.

For Rsync:

The remote device must be a NAS that supports rsync or a computer running the rsync

utility. Fill in the following fields in order to be able to access it.

• Remote NAS Address

• Username (always “admin”)

• Remote Admin’s Password

Click Show target conten t to connect to the remote NAS or computer so you can select

the target folder for the backup.

Local Select this if you want to place your backup in another volume in the NAS. Select the

folder where you want to place the backup.

External Select this if you have a USB hard disk connected to the NAS th at you want to use for

your backup. Select the folder where you want to place the backup.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Table 130 Protect > Backup: Step 2 (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

326

Figure 203 Protect > Backup: Step 3

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.3.4 Backup: Step 4

Click this to specify the schedule for the backup job. The backup job automatically runs according

to the schedule that you set in this screen.

Table 131 Protect > Backup: Step 3

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Compression Select Yes if you want NAS to compress the files for your backup. Otherwise, choose No.

In an Archive backup, compression is a method of packing computing files in a way that

saves hard disk space.

For a Synchronization backup (to a remote target), the source data will be compressed

before the transmission to reduce the transmission time. It is used in slow networ ks only.

Encryption Select Yes if you want NAS to encrypt the files for your backup. Otherwise, choose No.

In an Archive backup, this means using a password to secure files.

For a Synchronization backup (to a remote target), this means securing the file transfer

session. However the final file stored on the remote NAS is unencrypted. This takes a long

time. Make sure you really need thi s feature before enabling it.

Bandwidth Restrict the bandwidth of synchronization backups to help stop them from using all of your

network connection’s available bandwidth. This is more important when backing up to a

remote NAS or computer through the Internet.

Purge Policy The NAS maintains the files that have been included in your backups. However to save hard

disk space, you can choose to delete files that have been inclu ded in previous backups.

• Select Keep All Old Backup files to store all files that have been included in previous

backups.

• If you want to store a certain number of backup files, select Keep Only the last n

backup files (1-30). Enter a value (n) from 1 to 30 to specify how many backups the

NAS stores. All backup files older than the last one are deleted. You will not be able to

recover files that existed (only) in those previous backups. Select this if backup space is

limited and recovery of old files is not important.

• If you want to store all backups for a certain time period, select Keep Backups for n

day(s)(1-3650). Enter a value (n) from 1 to 3650 to specify how many days the NAS

stores all backup files. After this day has expired, all backup files will be deleted.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

327

Figure 204 Protect > Backup: Step 4

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.3.5 Edit Job Screen

Use this screen to edit an existing backup job. Some attributes of the backup job cannot be

changed, such as the name, backup type, source folder and so on.

Table 132 Protect > Backup: Step 4

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Scheduler

Backup Frequency Select from Hourly, Daily, Weekly and Monthly backup intervals. The screen changes

depending on the item you select.

Every how many

hours? This is only available if you selected Hourly as your backup frequency.

Select every how many hours the NAS performs the backup job.

On which minute of

the hour? This is only available if you selected Hourly as your backup frequency.

Select the minute (from 0 to 59) in an hour when the NAS performs the backup job.

Start Time

(hh:mm) This is available if you selected Daily, Weekly or Monthly as your backup frequency.

Select the time in hour:minute format when you want the NAS to perform the backup

job.

Every how many

days? This is only available if you selected Daily as your backup frequency.

Enter the interval between days when the NAS performs the backup job.

Every how many

weeks? This is only available if you selected Weekly as your backup frequency.

Enter the interval between weeks when NAS performs the backup job.

Step 1: Please

select the month(s)

of a year

This is only available if you selected Monthly as your backup frequency.

Select the month(s) when you want the NAS to perform the backup job.

Step 2: Please

select the day of

the month

This is only available if you selected Monthly as your backup frequency.

Select the day in a month when you want the NAS to perform the backup job.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Done Click this to close the screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

328

27.3.6 Edit Job: Step 1

Click Protect > Backup. Select a backup job from the list and click Edit Job to open the Edit Job

screen.

Figure 205 Protect > Backup > Edit: Step 1

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 133 Protect > Backup > Edit: Step 1

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Job Settings

Job Name This field is read-only and shows the name of the backup job.

Job Description Enter a short description for the backup job.

Backup Type This field is read-only and shows the backup type.

Source folder(s)/

file(s) This is read-only and shows the path of the source folder for backup.

Backup Target This field is read-only and shows on which volume (whether internal or external) the

backup files are stored. If the target location is a remote NAS, this shows the remote IP

address.

Target Path This field is read-only and shows the target folder for the backup files.

Compression This field is read-only and shows whether the backup employs compression.

Compression reduces the size of the file that you want to back up. Backup is then faster,

but restoring may be slower, so if backup space is not a concern and recovery speed is,

then turn off compression.

Encryption This field is read-only and shows whether the backup em ploys encryption.

You can have the NAS use a password to encrypt the backup files.

Bandwidth For backups to a remote NAS, you can restrict the bandwidth to help prevent the

backups from using all of your network connection’s available bandwidth. This is more

important when backing up to a remote NAS or computer through the Internet .

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

329

27.3.7 Edit Job: Step 2

Use this screen to edit the schedule for the backup job.

Figure 206 Protect > Backup > Edit: Step 2

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Purge Policy The NAS maint a ins the files that have been included in your backups. However to save

hard disk space, you can choose to delete files that have been included in previous

backups.

• Select Keep All Old Backup files to store all files that have been included in

previous backups.

• If you want to store a certain number of backup files, select Keep Only the last n

backup files (1-30). Enter a value (n) from 1 to 30 to specify how many backups

the NAS stores. All backup files older than the last one are deleted. You will not be

able to recover files that existed (only) in those previo us backups. Select this if

backup space is limited and recovery of old files is not important.

• If you want to store all backups for a certain time period, select Keep Backups for

n day(s)(1-3650). Enter a v alue (n) from 1 to 3650 to speci fy how many days the

NAS stores all backup files. After this day has expired, all backup files will be

deleted.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Table 133 Protect > Backup > Edit: Step 1 (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 134 Protect > Backup > Edit: Step 2

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Scheduler Settings

Backup Frequency Edit this by selectin g from Hourly, Daily, Weekly and Monthly backup intervals. The

screen changes depending on th e item you select.

Every how many

hours? This is only available if you selected Hourly as your backup frequency.

Select every how many hours the NAS performs t he backup job.

On which minute of

the hour? This is only available if you selected Hourly as your backup frequency.

Select the minute (from 0 to 59) in an hour when the NAS performs the backup job.

Start Time (hh:mm) This is available if you selected Daily, Weekly or Monthly as your backup frequency.

Select the time in hour:minute format when you want the NAS to perform the backup

job.

Every how many

days? This is on ly available if you selected Daily as your backup frequency.

Enter the interval between days when the NAS performs the backup job.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

330

27.3.8 Restore Archive Screen

Use this screen to restore previous backups made with the NAS.

27.3.9 Restore Archive: Step 1

Click Protect > Backup screen (Section 27.3 on page 321). Y ou can restore a previous backup job

by selecting a backup job from the list and clicking Restore Archive.

Figure 207 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 1

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Every how many

weeks? This is only available if you selected Weekly as your backup frequency.

Enter the interval between weeks when NAS performs the backup job.

Step 1: Please

select the month(s)

of a year

This is only available if you selected Monthly as your backup frequency.

Select the month(s) when you want the NAS to perform the backup job.

Step 2: Please

select the day of the

month

This is only available if you selected Monthly as your backup frequency.

Select the day in a month when you want the NAS to perform the backup job.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Done Click this to close the screen.

Table 134 Protect > Backup > Edit: Step 2 (continued)

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Table 135 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 1

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 1. Select

Restore Source Select a previous archive backup that you want to restore to the NAS.

Job Information

Job Name This is the name to identify the backup job.

Job Description This is a short description (up to 100 keyboard characters) for the backup job.

Backup Type This is the type of backup implemented for the backup job.

Scheduler

Information This field displays the backup’s frequency.

Restored Time Select a previous backup in the list that you want to restore to your NAS.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

331

27.3.10 Restore Archive: Step 2

Use this screen to select the folde r where the archive you want to restore is located.

Figure 208 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 2

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.3.11 Restore Archive: Step 3

Use this screen to select the location in the NAS where you want to restore your backup.

Figure 209 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 3

Table 136 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 2

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 2. Please select which file(s)/folder(s) to restore.

Folder Chooser Select the folder where the backup you want to restore is located.

Selected Folder This shows the path of the folder you selected.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

332

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.4 Restore Screen

Use this screen to restore previous backups made with the NAS, including archives and folders from

internal, external or remote NASs to the NAS.

27.4.1 Restore: Step 1

You can access this screen by clicking Protect > Restore.

Table 137 Protect > Backup > Restore Archive: Step 3

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 3. Set a restore target and start restoring

Original Lo cation Select this to restore t he files to their original location in the NAS.

Other Location Click this to select a folder where you want to place the restored files. Click Browse to

open the following screen.

•Volume - Select a volume from the list.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Type - This identifies the item as a file or folder.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Click Apply to save your settings and Cancel to close the screen.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Done Click this to run the restore process and go back to the Backup screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

333

Figure 210 Protect > Restore: Step 1

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

Table 138 Protect > Restore: Step 1

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 1. Select

Restore Source Select a previous archive backup that you want to restore to the NAS.

Select Remote NAS if the file is in another NAS in the network that you used for your

backup. Fill in the fields below when you choose this option.

Select Internal or External Volume if you want to use another volume in the NAS or an

attached USB hard disk for your backup. Click Browse to select the backup file.

IP Address Enter the address of the NAS you want to use.

User Enter the username you use to access the NAS .

Password Enter the password of your NAS account.

Share Name Enter the name of the share you want to use.

Test Connection Click this to test your connection to the remote NAS that you have specified in the fields

above.

Browse Click this to select where the previous backup that you want to restore is located.

•Volume - Select a volume from the list.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Type - This identifies the item as a file or folder.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Click Apply to save your settings and Cancel to close the screen.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

334

27.4.2 Restore: Step 2

Select a previous archive backup that you want to restore to the NAS.

Figure 211 Protect > Restore: Step 2

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.4.3 Restore: Step 3

Use this screen to select the folder where the archive you want to restore is located.

Table 139 Protect > Restore: Step 2

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 2. Select

Restore Point If you selected Remote NAS for the backup you want to restore, you can see a list of all the

backups you performed in the Job Name table.

If you selected Internal or External Volume for the backup you want to restore, you can

see a list of restore times for the backups you performed in the Restored Time table.

Job Name Select a previous backup job in the list that you want to restore to your NAS. Once you

choose a job name, all available restore times for that backup job shows in the Restored

Time table.

Restored Time Select a previous backup job in the list that you want to restore to your NAS.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

335

Figure 212 Protect > Restore: Step 3

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.4.4 Restore: Step 4

Use this screen to select the location in the NAS where you want to restore your backup.

Figure 213 Protect > Restore: Step 4

Table 140 Protect > Restore: Step 3

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 3. Please select which file(s)/folder(s) to restore.

Folder Chooser Select the folder where the backup you want to restore is located.

Selected Folder This shows the path of the folder you selected.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Next Click this to go to the next screen.

Chapter 27 Protect

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

336

The following table describes the labels in this screen.

27.5 Configuration File Backup and Restoration

Use the Maintenance > Configuration menus to create a file of your NAS configurations such as

passwords, shares and volumes created, network settings and so on. If you’re going to do some

major configuration changes, then it is advisable to create a configuration backup file. If things go

wrong after you make the configuration changes, you can always go back to the previous

configuration by restoring an earlier configuration file.

If you forgot the NA S password, then use the RESET button (see Section 1.7 on page 17) to return

the NAS to the factory default configuration.

Note: Configuration File Backup and Restoration does not affect data (your files and

folders), volumes on the NAS.

Table 141 Protect > Restore: Step 4

LABEL DESCRIPTION

Step 3. Set a restore target and start restoring

Browse Click this to select a folder where you want to place the restored files.

•Volume - Select a volume from the list.

•Current Location - This is the location of the selected folder.

•Type - This identifies the item as a file or folder.

•Name - This is the name of the folder/file.

Click Apply to save your settings and Cancel to close the screen.

Previous Click this to go back to the previous screen.

Done Click this to run the restore process and go back to the Backup screen.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

337

CHAPTER 28

Troubleshooting

28.1 Troubleshooting Overview

This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential

problems are divided into the following categories.

•Power, Hardware, Connections, and LEDs

•NAS Starter Utility

•NAS Login and Access

•I Cannot Access The NAS

•Users Cannot Access the NAS

•External USB Drives

•Storage

•Firmware

•File Transfer

•Networking

•Some Features’ Screens Do Not Display

•Media Server Functions

•Download Service Functions

•Web Publishing

•Auto Upload

•Package Management

•Backups

•Google Drive

28.2 Power, Hardware, Connections, and LEDs

The NAS PWR LED does not turn on (no LEDs are on).

• Make sure the NAS is turned on.

• Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the NAS.

• Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the NAS and plugged in to an appropriate

power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

338

• Turn the NAS off and on.

• If the problem continues, contact the vendor.

An HDD LED is off.

The HDD LED is off when the NAS cannot detect a hard drive in the drive bay. Replace or install a

hard drive. See Installing or replacing a hard disk.

An HDD LED is red.

Red means that the NAS detected an error on the hard drive (like a bad sector for example). The

NAS automatically tries to recover a bad sector, but the LED stays red until the NAS restarts. Even

if the hard drive still functions, it is recommended that you replace it since errors are a sign that the

hard drive may fail soon. See Installing or replacing a hard disk.

Installing or replacing a hard disk.

Do not remove or inst all a hard disk while the NAS is turned on. The NAS

must be turned off before you remove or install the hard disk.

1Turn the NAS off, remove the front panel and make sure:

• there is a SATA I or SATA II (3.0 Gbit/s) compatible hard disk installed.

• the hard disk is installed correctly in the disk bay. Push the disk back into the NAS disk bay

until the hard disk is fitted snugly inside the NAS (see the NAS Quick Start Guide).

• the hard disk could be faulty. Try a different hard drive or test the original hard disk in a

different NAS or computer.

2If you had to replace the drive, turn on the NAS and go to the Storage screen.

• If you have a RAID I volume click the Repair icon next to the new drive.

• If you are using RAID 0 you will need to recreate the whole volume. All of your data is lost.

• If you are using a single-disk JBOD volume, you need to create a new volume on the new

drive.

• If you are using a two-disk JBOD volume, you need to create a whole new volume on both

drives.

The LAN LED (by the LAN port) is off.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

339

• Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected properly to the NAS and connected to another

(Ethernet) device. Make sure the other device is turned on. If it’s connected directly to a

computer, make sure that the computer network card is working (ping 127.0.0.1 on the

computer).

• Use another Ethernet cable. If you’re connecting to a Gigabit Ethernet, make sure you’re using

an 8-wire Ethernet cable.

• If the problem continues, contact the vendor.

See Table 1 on page 15 for a description of NAS LEDs.

The NAS turns off or reboots by itself.

Check the Power Management screen. This is where you configure power settings for the NAS,

including power saving, UPS, power on/off during power failure and power on/off schedule. The

NAS may be set to turn off under certain conditions.

A power failure occurred while the NAS was downloading files.

• If power failure occurs during the active download period, the NAS will verify whether the

downloaded files were damaged.

• If a file is corrupted, the NAS will download the file again.

• If the file is intact but not completely downloaded, the NAS will resume the download task after

it restarts.

28.3 NAS Starter Utility

The NAS Starter Utility cannot discover my NAS.

• Close the NAS Starter Utility and reopen it.

• Check your hardware connections and make sure they are set up correctly.

• Only one instance of the NAS Starter Utility can run on your computer. Make sure you close any

duplicate windows for this application.

• Wait for the SYS LED to stop blinking before clicking Discover.

• Confirm that the computer running the NAS Starter Utility has a network connection. See the

section on the NAS’s LAN connection for related information.

• The computer running the NAS Starter Utility can only discover NASs in the same subnet. NASs

connected to the same switch or router as your NAS Starter Utility computer are usually in the

same subnet unless the router is doing subnetting or the switch is implementing VLAN.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

340

The NAS Starter Utility discovered my NAS but the stat us is always unreachable, even

though I can access it.

You may need to add the NAS Starter Utility to your software firewall’s allow list or lower your

software firewall or anti- virus scanner’s security lev el. Alternatively you may have to configure your

software firewall or other security software to allow UDP port 50127 traffic from the NA S. If there is

a hardware firewall between you and the NAS, configure it to allow UDP port 50127 traffic from the

NAS.

I have at least two NASs in my network, how do I identify which one I want to configure in

the NAS Starter Utility screens.

If you have sev eral NASs connected to your computer/network, giv e each a unique name. You may

have to disconnect all but one and use the NAS Starter Utility to rename it. Then connect another

NAS and rename it and continue to connect and rename the NASs one-by-one until they are all

connected and each has a unique name.

Alternatively, if you have a DHCP server on your network and you can access it’s list of assigned IP

addresses, you could see which IP address belongs to which NAS. You can check the MAC address

of your NAS by checking the attached sticker in the de vice housing.

28.4 NAS Login and Access

I forgot the server name of the NAS.

• The default server name is ‘NA S’ followed by the number of y our model (‘NAS540’ for example).

• Use the NAS Starter Utility to discover your NAS. If you have admin privileges, you can directly

change the IP address of the NAS using the NAS Starter Utility.

• If the server name has changed and you don’t have the NAS Starter Utility, see Section 1.7 on

page 17 to use the RESET button to return to the default setting.

I cannot get to the NAS login screen.

• Use the NAS Starter Utility to discover your NAS. If you have admin privileges, you can directly

change the IP address of the NAS using the NAS Starter Utility.

• Make sure you have used the NAS Starter Utility to initialize your NAS.

• If you used the RESET button, the NAS may have a new IP address. Close and reopen the NAS

Starter Utility to discover the NAS.

• Make sure the NAS is turned on.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

341

• If you are trying to login directly by typing the server name into your web browser ’s address

field, make sure you are using the correct server name as the web site address.

• The default server name is ‘NAS’ followed by the number of your model (‘NAS540’ for

example). If you have changed the server name, use the new one.

• If the server name has been changed and you do not know the new server name, see the

troubleshooting suggestions for I forgot the server name of the NAS.

• If it still doesn’t work, try using the NAS Starter Utility.

• Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See the

Quick Start Guide and Tab le 1 on page 15.

• By default, the NAS gets an IP address automatically. The NAS assigns itself an IP address if no

device assigns one. If your computer is also set to get an IP address automatically, the computer

and the NAS can both assign themselves IP addresses and communicate. See S ection 10.4 on

page 107 if you need to configure the NAS with a static IP address.

• If you are connecting to the NAS by its IP address, mak e sure you use the correct one. If the NAS

has a wired Ethernet connection and a wireless connection through an attached USB wireless

dongle, the NAS has a different IP address for each connection. To connect through the wired

Ethernet connection, use the wired Ethernet connection’s IP address. To connect through the

wireless connection, use the wireless connection’s IP address.

• Make sure your computer’ s IP address is in the same subnet as the NAS’s IP address. Y ou can use

the NAS Starter Utility to find the NAS’s IP address. Skip this if you know that there are routers

between your computer and the NAS.

• Ping the NAS from your computer. Make sure your computer’s Ethernet adapter is installed and

functioning properly. In a (Windows) computer, click Start, (All) Programs, Accessories and

then Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt window, type “ping” followed by the NAS’s

IP address (use the NAS Starter Utility to find the NAS’s IP address if you don’t know it) and then

press [ENTER].

• Make sure you are using Internet Explorer 6.0 (and later) or Firefox 1.07 (and later).

• Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has JavaScript and Java

enabled. With Internet Explorer 6, you ma y also have to enable scripting of safe ActiveX controls.

See Section 28.4.1 on page 341.

I forgot the password.

• The default password is 1234.

• If you have changed the password and forgotten it, you will have to reset the NAS.

28.4.1 Enabling Scripting of Safe ActiveX Controls

If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that scripting of

safe ActiveX controls is enabled.

1In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

342

Figure 214 Internet Options: Security

2Click the Custom Level... button.

3Under Script ActiveX controls marked safe for scripting, make sure that Enable is selected

(the default).

4Click OK to close the window.

Figure 215 Security Settings - Script Safe ActiveX C o ntrols

I can see the login screen, but I cannot log in to the NAS.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

343

• Make sure you have entered the username and password correctly. The default username is

admin, and the default password is 1234. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps

Lock] is not on.

• Turn the NAS off and on.

• If this does not work, see Section 1.7 on page 17 to reset the device.

I cannot see the multi-language web configu rator screens while using Internet Explorer.

Use Section 28.4.1 on p a ge 341 to enable the scripting of safe ActiveX controls.

The We b Con f ig urator logs out by itself.

The web configurator management session automatically times out if it is left idle for 15 minutes.

Simply log back into the NAS if this happens to you.

28.5 I Cannot Access The NAS

I cannot access a share.

• Check that the NAS is turned on and connected to the network. Try to ping the NAS or use the

NAS Starter Utility to discover it.

• Make sure you have used the NAS Starter Utility to initialize y our NAS. See Chapter 2 on page 19

for more information.

• Check that you entered your login name and password correctly.

• Check that the share exists and check its access settings.

• Check if the shared folder is a subfolder of another (parent) share. Check that the parent share’ s

access rights do not conflict with the subfolder share. It is recommended that you do not create

subfolder shares.

• Check if there are any existing mapped network drives to the NAS. You may need to disconnect

existing mapped network drives as a new mapped network drive connection may use (different)

previously-saved login information. To do this, open Windows Explorer and click Tools >

Disconnect Mapped Network Drives.

• Check that the volume in which the share resides, exists and is not down or degraded. If it is

down or degraded, see Section 28.2 on page 337.

• Make sure you have the client for Microsoft networks installed and enabled in your network

connection’s properties.

• In Windows XP or 2000, click Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network Connections

(Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT) > Local Area Connection >

Properties.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

344

•Check that Client for Microsoft Networks is in the list of components and has its check box

selected.

28.6 Users Cannot Access the NAS

A local user cannot access a share

• Check that the NAS is turned on and connected to the network. The local user should try to ping

the NAS or use the NAS Starter Utility to discover it.

• The local user should check that he entered his login name and password correctly.

• Check if the share exists and has the correct access settings for this user.

• Check the Access Control List (ACL) of read/write permissions associated with specific files and/

or folders. Account names added to the list are linked to the files and folders that they are

allowed to access, along with what kinds of actions they are allowed to perform with those files

and folders (delete, move, rename, and so on).

• The user’s computer may already be connected to another of the NAS’s shares using a different

user name and/or password. This can happen without the user realizing it if the user’s computer

automatically connects to a share at logon. Right-click any other connected shares and click

Disconnect. Then re-attempt to connect to the desired share.

• Check if the share has an ANONYMOUS or EVERYONE access right. If the user is already logged

into a share using her username and password, she will NOT be able to access a share that has

ANONYMOUS FTP only access rights (as these require ‘no login’). In this case she should log out

and try to access the share again without logging in. See Section 17.4 on page 215 for more

details.

• Check if the shared folder is a subfolder of another (parent) share. Check that the parent share’ s

access rights do not conflict with the subfolder share. It is recommended that you do not create

subfolder shares.

• Check if the user belongs to a group with conflicting access rights. DENY always takes

precedence. If you allow a user FULL access to a share but set his group to DENY, then he will

NOT be able to access the share.

• The local user should check if there are any existing mapped network drives to the NAS. He ma y

need to disconnect existing CIFS connections as new CIFS connection may use previously-sa v ed

• Check that the array in which the share resides, exists and is not down or degraded. If the array

is down or degraded, see Section 28.2 on page 337.

• If the user is using DFS links, then he can only access the NAS using CIFS and not FTP.

• Check that the share has not been disabled.

I cannot import domain user or user group information even though testi ng of the connection

to the domain controller is OK.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

345

• Check the NAS’s DNS setting. The DNS server the NAS is using must be able to resolve the

domain controller’s address. If the domain controller uses a priv ate IP address, the NAS needs to

use a private DNS server. If the domain controller uses a public IP address, the NAS needs to use

a public DNS server.

• Leave the domain and re-join it.

A domain user can’t access a share.

In addition to the checks listed previously for local users, check that the domain controller is turned

on and connected to the network.

A user can acce ss a share but cannot ac cess individual folders or files wi thin the share.

• Check the Access Control List (ACL) of read/write permissions associated with the share’s

specific files and/or folders. Account names added to the list are linked to the files and folders

that they are allowed to access, along with what kinds of actions they are allowed to perform

with those files and folders (delete, move, rename, and so on).

28.7 External USB Drives

The COPY LED is red.

Copying files to or from a USB device or SD card failed. The USB device or SD card may not be

compatible with the NAS. Try to save the files onto a computer and then from the computer to the

NAS (through the network connection).

28.8 Storage

Migrating from RAID 1 to RAID 5 did not expand the storage capacity.

The NAS normally expands the storage capacity by itself after rebuilding the RAID but may not if

the NAS rebooted during the RAID re-build.

After the re-build finishes, go to the Storage screens and select the volume or disk group and click

Manage and use Expand the volume with unallocated disk space.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

346

Re placing smaller disks in a RAID 1, RAID 5, or RAID 6 with larger capacity hard disks did not

expand the storage capacity.

The NAS normally expands the storage capacity by itself after rebuilding the RAID but may not if

the NAS rebooted during the RAID re-build.

After the re-build finishes, go to the Storage screens and select the volume or disk group and click

Manage and use Expand the volume with unallocated disk space.

28.9 Firmware

I want to know the firmware version on the NAS.

Go to the Status screen. The Firmware field shows you the current firmware version running.

28.10 File Transfer

I want to transfer my file(s) from my local computer or storage device to the NAS.

• After you initialize your hard disk, you can directly access the folders in your NAS and transfer

files in the same way you transfer files in your local computer:

1On your Windows computer, click Start > Run or open a web browser.

2Enter \\nas followed by the number of your model (540 for example) or the Server Name you

assigned the NAS. This shows you the folders in the NAS.

3Use drag-and-drop or copy-and-paste to transfer files over to your NAS.

•Use the COPY/SYNC button to transfer files from an external (USB) storage device to the NAS.

I want to transfer my file(s) from the NAS to my local computer or storage device.

• After you initialize your hard disk, you can directly access the folders in your NAS and transfer

files in the same way you transfer files in your local computer:

1On your Windows computer, click Start > Run or open a web browser.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

347

2Enter \\nas followed by the number of your model (540 for example) or the Server Name you

assigned the NAS. This shows you the folders in the NAS.

3Use drag-and-drop or copy -and-paste to transfer files from your NAS to your local computer’s folder

or your storage device.

• Y ou can download the files from your NAS. Just click on the file(s) in the Share Browsing screen

(Section 11.2 on page 124). Your computer will prompt you for the location where you want to

save the file.

28.11 Networking

I want to control who can access my folder(s)/file(s).

• If you are an administrator, you can configure a user’s access rights. Use the Shares screen

(Section 24.3 on page 291) to do this.

•If you enabled Web Publishing for a folder, any one on y our network can play the media files in

the published shares. No user name and password or other form of security is used. The media

server is enabled by default with the video, photo, and music shares published.

One of the computers in my network cannot use the printer I connected to the NAS.

• You must install the printer driver on each computer that will use the printer.

•Check Section 28.4 on page 340 and check for related connectivity issues.

28.12 Some Features’ Screens Do Not Display

Many NAS features require a valid internal volume.

Features like the print server, download service, FTP and Windows/CIFS access will not work

without a valid internal volume. Make sure you have a volume on an internal disk and that the

volume is in the healthy state.

• Install an internal disk if one is not installed yet or has failed. See the Quick Start Guide for how

to install an internal disk.

• Create a new volume if you do not have one on the internal disk yet.

• Make sure the volume on the installed internal disk is in a healthy state.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

348

I cannot use some applications in the Web Configurator.

• The firmware installed in your NA S includes the features mentioned in Section 10.8 on page 122.

This does not include the applications you can install using the Package Management screen.

• You can use the Package Management screen (Chapter 18 on page 246) to install more

applications from a web location (specified in the firmware) to your NAS.

• If you have installed the application and can see the application’s configuration screen but still

cannot use it, check that you have Enabled the application.

28.13 Media Server Functions

I set the media server function to publish a folder, but some of the files in the folder do not

display in the li st on the media client.

Files with formats that are not supported on the media server ma y not display in th e list. See page

354 for the file formats that the media server supports.

I published a folder with the media server function, but the media client does not play some

of the files (or does not play them properly).

1Files with formats that are not supported on the media server ma y not display in th e list. See page

354 for the file formats that the media server supports.

2If you are using media client software, you may need to install codecs on y our computer. Since the

media client software uses your computer ’s installed codecs, files do not play if the required codec

is not installed on your computer.

3The media client may not support the file’s format.

iTunes does not display the names of all the music files I just put on the NAS.

1Make sure the files are a format supported by iTunes. See page 354.

2Go to Applications > Media Server. Make sure the share containing the music files is published

and the iTunes server option is enabled.

3If an iTunes client is connected, the NAS’s iTunes server function scans the published media server

folders for files every three minutes. Leave iTunes connected to the NAS for three minutes. Then

use the NAS’s eject button (as shown next) to disconnec t.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

349

Figure 216 iTunes Eject Button

4Then click the NAS’s link to reconnect.

Figure 217 iTunes Reconnected

5Another way to get the NAS’s iTunes server function to scan the published media server folders for

files is to go to Applications > Media Server and disable and re-enable the iTunes server option.

If you uploaded many files, it may take awhile for the NAS to find and list all of them. Then try

reconnecting your iTunes client.

I cannot use iTunes to play files located on my NAS.

1Make sure the files are a format supported by iTunes. See page 354.

2If you have files from the iTunes Store that use DRM, you need to use your Apple account ID and

password to authorize other computers to play the files. Apple permits you to authorize up to five

computers at a time. To authorize a computer, open iTunes and click Store > Authorize

Computer.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

350

3If you are connecting through a NAT router, make sure that TCP port 3689 and UDP port 5353 are

open for traffic on both the server and the client and all points in between (especially the NAT

router). If your router includes a firewall, make sure it also allows TCP port 3689 and UDP port

5353 traffic.

28.14 Download Service Functions

The download list items are missing after I removed a hard drive.

The NAS’s download list is stored on the system volume. If you have two JBOD volumes, it is

possible to remove one and still use the other. However if you remove the system volume, you may

lose the download list. With two JBOD volumes, the hard disk that was installed first is usually the

system volume.

I cannot find the download files.

By default, the Download Service feature stores downloaded files as follows:

• P2P download jobs are stored in /*/incoming (where ‘*’ is a folder that you have set.)

• HTTP/FTP jobs are stored in /* (where ‘*’ is a folder that you have set.)

• All jobs triggered by RSS channels create the subfolder in /* using the channel name where it

store all files downloaded from that channel (where ‘*’ is a folder that you have set.)

Check your Preferences in the Download Service (Section 17.7 on page 219) screens to know or

configure where downloaded files are stored.

28.15 Web Publishing

A web-published share cannot be accessed by web browser from the Internet.

• Make sure the person trying to access the share is using the correct web address (and port

number if the NAS’s web publishing feature is not using port 80). See page 240 for details.

• Make sure the publishing feature is turned on and the share is in the list of published shares.

• Make sure the person trying to access the share is using Internet Explorer 6.0 (and later) or

Firefox 1.07 (and later).

• You need to use a public address to access the NAS’s web-published shares from the Internet. If

your NAS uses a private IP address, use the public IP address of your Internet gateway (firewall)

and configure NAT or port forwarding on your Internet gateway and possibly firewall rules in

order to let people access the NAS’s web-published shares from the Internet.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

351

• Make sure the firewall’s public IP address is static or that the firewall uses a Dynamic Domain

Name (DDNS).

• Web publishing uses TCP protocol and the port number you specify. Make sure there is not

another service using TCP protocol with the same port number.

• If Firefox access to the share does not work, check that you did not set the Web publishing

feature to use one of the following ports. (Firefox blocks these ports by default.)

• Make sure your ISP allows you to run a server and is not blocking the port number of the NAS’s

web publishing feature.

28.16 Auto Upload

The NAS does not automatically upload files to Flickr or YouTube.

1Make sure the NAS is connected to the Internet. See Section 10.4 on page 107 for details about

testing network connections.

2Click Maintenance > Log to check the NAS’s log for a message about the file.

2a If the log message displays “no such file or directory”, the file may have been removed from

the NAS. Make sure the file still exists in the watch folder.

Table 142 Ports Blocked By Default in Firefox

PORT SERVICE PORT SERVICE PORT SERVICE

1 tcpmux 95 supdup 513 login

7 echo 101 hostriame 514 shell

9 discard 102 iso-tsap 515 printer

11 systat 103 gppitnp 526 tempo

13 daytime 104 acr-nema 530 courier

15 netstat 109 POP2 531 chat

17 qotd 110 POP3 532 netnews

19 chargen 111 sunrpc 540 uucp

20 ftp data 113 auth 556 remotefs

21 ftp control 115 sftp 563 NNTP+SSL

22 ssh 117 uucp-path 587 submission

23 telnet 119 NNTP 601 syslog

25 smtp 123 NTP 636 LDAP+SSL

37 time 135 loc-srv epmap 993 IMAP+SSL

42 name 139 netbios 995 POP3+SSL

43 nicname 143 IMAP2 2049 nfs

53 domain 179 BGP 4045 lockd

77 priv-rjs 389 LDAP 6000 X11

79 finger 465 SMTP+SSL

87 ttylink 512 print exec

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

352

2b If the log message displays “filename is queued”, the file may still be waiting for auto upload.

Check the grace period setting in the service’s Configuration screen. You can set a smaller

grace period to shorten the queue time.

2c If you cannot find any log messages about the file:

•Make sure the Folder Watch List includes the folder containing the file. Y ou can upload the

file to the watch folder again.

• Make sure the file’ s format is supported by Flickr or Y ouTube. Y ou can find the supported file

extensions in the Folder Watch List.

2d If the log message displays “not authorized yet”, check if you can enter the NAS’s

Configuration screen for the service. If you changed the password of your Flickr or YouTube

account, you cannot access the service’s Configuration screen, and the NAS cannot auto

upload files. Make sure you also update the account information in the NAS.

3Make sure the file size does not exceed the limit imposed by the service. At the time of writing,

Flickr restricts the file size to 10 MB, and YouTube restricts the file size to 100 MB.

4Make sure you did not ex ceed the service’s upload quota. Flickr and YouTube have different policies

about how much you can upload within a certain period, for example, 100 MB/week.

5The NAS may hav e temporarily failed to con nect to the service. You can upload the file to the watch

folder again.

28.17 Package Management

The NAS won’t install the package(s) I selected in the Package Management screen.

• The web location of the package may be undergoing maintenance. Try again at a later time.

Upgrade the firmware of the NAS.

• If a new firmware is available, do an upgrade and try installing the package(s) again.

I want to know how my hard disk is performing.

Use S.M.A.R.T. (Self Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology) to monitor hard disks. It

detects and reports the reliability of hard disks using standard indicators, enabling administrators to

anticipate possible disk failures.

28.18 Backups

I cannot make a backup.

Chapter 28 Troubleshooting

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

353

• Check that enough space is available on the external disk. If there isn’t you may need to purge

older backups or delete other files on the backup USB disk or NAS.

• If you are using the Backup screen (Section 27.3 on page 321):

• You can look at the Backup screen’s Last Run Result display.

• If you’re backing up to another NAS or a computer, check that it allows the NAS to write files to

it. For a synchronization backup, the target must be another NAS or another compatible

model.

• Check that the NAS is not performing another backup job. Scheduler queues backups when a

different backup is already going on at the time a backup is scheduled.

The backup does not run at the time configured.

• Check that the correct time is configured on the NAS.

• Check that the NAS is able to access the time server from which it gets the time; see Section

16.6 on page 210.

28.19 Google Drive

Google Drive stopped syncing.

1Make sure the NAS is connected to the Internet. See Section 10.4 on page 107 for details about

testing network connections.

2Check if you have exceeded the Google Drive account’s storage quota. You may need to:

• Delete unneeded files.

• Empty the Google Drive trash bin. Note, this permanently deletes everything in the bin, even if

Google moved it there without telling you (because you moved a file out of the local sync folder

for example).

• Upgrade the account’s capacity

3Click Maintenance > Log to check the NAS’s log messages. If a log message says you have

exceeded your storage quota on the NAS:

• Delete unneeded files.

• Clean out the recycle bin (see Section 24.4.2 on page 296).

• Increase the user’s quota on the volume containing the local sync folder (see Section 22. 3.2 on

page 283).

4Check for any logs abou t remov al of the user account. When you remo ve a user’ s NAS account, the

NAS also removes the link to the user’s Google account. However the NAS keeps the data in the

local sync folder. Reconfigure a user account and link it to the Google account to let the user use

Google Drive again.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

354

APPENDIX A

Product Specifications

See also Chapter 1 on page 14 for a general overview of the key features.

Supported Media Server Content Formats

The following describes the details about the files that the NAS media server can publish.

• Audio: LPCM (not supported as a file format), MP3, WMA, M4A, M4B, MP4, 3GP, WAV, OGG, FLAC,

AAC, MP2, AC3, MPA, MP1, AIF, ASF, FLV, DSD

• Images: JPEG, PNG, TIF, TIFF, BMP, GIF

• Video: WMV, MPEG2, MP1, MPG, SPTS, MP4, AVI, VOB , DivX, 3GP, VDR, MPE, DVR -MS, Xvid, M1V,

M4V, MOV, MPV, MKV, OGG, FLV, MTS

Note: Not all published file types can be viewed by all client applications.

Supported iTunes Server Content Formats

At the time of writing, the NAS supports iTunes publishing audio files of the following formats: mp3,

m4a, m4p, wav, and mp4.

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

355

APPENDIX B

Customer Support

In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your

vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you

bought the device.

See http://www.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml and also

http://www.zyxel.com/about_zyxel/zyxel_worldwide.shtml for the latest information.

Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.

Required Information

• Product model and serial number.

• Warranty Information.

• Date that you received your device.

• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.

Corporate Headquarters (Worldwide)

Taiwan

• ZyXEL Communications Corporation

• http://www.zyxel.com

Asia

China

• ZyXEL Communications (Shan ghai) Corp.

ZyXEL Communications (Beijing) Corp.

ZyXEL Communications (Tianjin) Corp.

• http://www.zyxel.cn

India

• ZyXEL Technology India Pvt Ltd

• http://www.zyxel.in

Kazakhstan

•ZyXEL Kazakhstan

Appendix B Customer Support

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

356

• http://www.zyxel.kz

Korea

• ZyXEL Korea Corp.

• http://www.zyxel.kr

Malaysia

• ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd.

• http://www.zyxel.com.my

Pakistan

• ZyXEL Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd.

• http://www.zyxel.com.pk

Philippines

• ZyXEL Philippines

• http://www.zyxel.com.ph

Singapore

• ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd.

• http://www.zyxel.com.sg

Taiwan

• ZyXEL Communications Corporation

• http://www.zyxel.com/tw/zh/

Thailand

• ZyXEL Thailand Co., Ltd

• http://www.zyxel.co.th

Vietnam

• ZyXEL Communications Corporation-Vietnam Office

• http://www.zyxel.com/vn/vi

Europe

Austria

• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH

• http://www.zyxel.de

Appendix B Customer Support

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

357

Belarus

•ZyXEL BY

• http://www.zyxel.by

Belgium

• ZyXEL Communications B.V.

• http://www.zyxel.com/be/nl/

• http://www.zyxel.com/be/fr/

Bulgaria

•ZyXEL България

• http://www.zyxel.com/bg/bg/

Czech Republic

• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o

• http://www.zyxel.cz

Denmark

• ZyXEL Communications A/S

• http://www.zyxel.dk

Estonia

•ZyXEL Estonia

• http://www.zyxel.com/ee/et/

Finland

• ZyXEL Communications

• http://www.zyxel.fi

France

•ZyXEL France

• http://www.zyxel.fr

Germany

• ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH

• http://www.zyxel.de

Hungary

• ZyXEL Hungary & SEE

• http://www.zyxel.hu

Appendix B Customer Support

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

358

Italy

• ZyXEL Communications Italy

• http://www.zyxel.it/

Latvia

•ZyXEL Latvia

• http://www.zyxel.com/lv/lv/homepage.shtml

Lithuania

• ZyXEL Lithuania

• http://www.zyxel.com/lt/lt/homepage.shtml

Netherlands

•ZyXEL Benelux

• http://www.zyxel.nl

Norway

• ZyXEL Communications

• http://www.zyxel.no

Poland

• ZyXEL Communications Poland

• http://www.zyxel.pl

Romania

•ZyXEL Romania

• http://www.zyxel.com/ro/ro

Russia

• ZyXEL Russia

• http://www.zyxel.ru

Slovakia

• ZyXEL Communications Czech s.r.o. organizacna zlozka

• http://www.zyxel.sk

Spain

• ZyXEL Communications ES Ltd

• http://www.zyxel.es

Sweden

• ZyXEL Communications

Appendix B Customer Support

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

359

• http://www.zyxel.se

Switzerland

•Studerus AG

• http://www.zyxel.ch/

Turkey

•ZyXEL Turkey A.S.

• http://www.zyxel.com.tr

• ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd.

• http://www.zyxel.co.uk

Ukraine

•ZyXEL Ukraine

• http://www.ua.zyxel.com

Latin America

Argentina

• ZyXEL Communication Corporation

• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Brazil

• ZyXEL Communications Brasil Ltda.

• https://www.zyxel.com/br/pt/

Ecuador

• ZyXEL Communication Corporation

• http://www.zyxel.com/ec/es/

Middle East

Israel

• ZyXEL Communication Corporation

• http://il.zyxel.com/homepage.shtml

Middle East

• ZyXEL Communication Corporation

Appendix B Customer Support

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

360

• http://www.zyxel.com/me/en/

North America

USA

• ZyXEL Communications, Inc. - North America Headquarters

• http://www.zyxel.com/us/en/

Oceania

Australia

• ZyXEL Communications Corporation

• http://www.zyxel.com/au/en/

Africa

South Africa

• Nology (Pty) Ltd.

• http://www.zyxel.co.za

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

361

APPENDIX C

Legal Information

The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into

any language, or tr ansmitted in any form or by an y means, elec tronic, mec hanical, mag netic, o ptical, che mical, phot ocopying , manual, or

otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.

Disclaimer

ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it

convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any

products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.

Regulatory Notice and Statement

UNITED STATES of AMERICA

The following information applies if you use the product within USA area.

FCC EMC St atement

• The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• Chan ges or modifi cations not exp ressly appr oved by the p arty respon sible for com pliance coul d void the us er’s aut hority to ope rate the

equipment.

• This product has been tested and complies with the specifications for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used according to the instructions, may cause

harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which is found by turning the equipment off and on,

the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

•Increase the separation between the equipment or devi ces

•Connect the equipment to an outlet other than the receiver’s

•Consult a dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for assistance

CANADA

The following information applies if you use the product within Canada area

Industry Canada ICES statement

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)

Appendix C Legal Information

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

362

EUROPEAN UNION

The following information applies if you use the product within the European Union.

List of national codes

Safety Warnings

• DO NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

• DO NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.

• DO NOT store things on the device.

• DO NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to th e device.

• DO NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage point s or other risks. ONLY

qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Plea se contact your vendor for further information.

• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.

• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.

• Always disconnect all cables from this device before se rvicing or disassembling.

• DO NO T remove th e plug and connect it to a po wer outlet by itse lf; always attach t he plug to the power adaptor first before connecting

it to a power outlet.

• DO NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power

adaptor or cord.

• Please use the provided or designated connection cables/power cables/ adaptors. Connect it to the right supply voltage (for example,

110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe). If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, it might cause electrocution. Remove it

from the de vice an d the pow er sou rce, re pairin g the po wer adap ter or c ord is pr ohibit ed. Co ntact y our loc al ve ndor t o order a n ew one.

• DO NOT use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.

• CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type, dispose of used batteries according to the instruction. Dispose

them at the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic devices. For detailed information about recycling of

this prod uct, pl ease co ntact y our l ocal cit y offi ce, yo ur hou sehold was te dis posal se rvice o r the st ore wher e you purch ased th e product.

• DO NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.

The following warning statements apply, where the disconnect device is not incorporated in the device or where the plug on the power

supply cord is intended to serve as the disconnect device,

• For permanently connected devices, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated external to the device;

• For pluggable devices, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the device and shall be eas ily accessible.

COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE COUNTRY ISO 3166 2 LETTER CODE

Austria AT Liechtenstein LI

Belgium BE Lithuania LT

Bulgaria BG Luxembourg LU

Croatia HR Malta MT

Cyprus CY Netherlands NL

Czech Republic CZ Norway NO

Denmark DK Poland PL

Estonia EE Portugal PT

Finland FI Romania RO

France FR Serbia RS

Germany DE Slovakia SK

Greece GR Slovenia SI

Hungary HU Spain ES

Iceland IS Switzerland CH

Ireland IE Sweden SE

Italy IT Turkey TR

Latvia LV United Kingdom GB

Appendix C Legal Information

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

363

Environment Statement

ErP (Energy-related Products)

ZyXEL products put on the EU market in compliance with the requirement of the European Parliament and the Council published

Directive 2009/125/EC establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign requirements for energy-related products (recast), so called

as "ErP Directive (Energy-related Products directive) as well as ecodesign requirement laid down in applicable implementing measures,

power consumption has satisfied regulation requirements which are:

Network standby power consumption < 12W, and/or

Off mode power consumption < 0.5W, and/or

Standby mode power consumption < 0.5W.

Wireless setting, please refer to "Wireless" chapter for more detail.

European Union - Disposal and Recycling Information

The symbol belo w means that ac cording to local regulat ions y our product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from domestic

waste. If this product is end of life, take it to a recycling station designated by local authorities. At the time of disposal, the separate

collection o f y o ur p r oduc t and / or its battery w il l help save n a tu ral resources and ens ure t hat th e environment is sust aina bl e development.

Die folgende Symbol bedeutet, dass Ihr Produkt und/oder seine Batterie gemäß den örtlichen Bestimmungen getrennt vom Hausmüll

entsorgt werden muss. Wenden Sie sich an eine Recyclingstation, wenn dieses Produkt das Ende seiner Lebensdauer erreicht hat. Zum

Zeitpunkt der Entsorgung wird die getrennte Sammlung von Produkt und/oder seiner Batterie dazu beitragen, natürliche Ressourcen zu

sparen und die Umwelt und die menschliche Gesundheit zu schützen.

El símbolo de abajo indica que según las regulaciones locales, su producto y/o su batería deberán depositarse como basura separada de la

doméstica. Cuando este producto alcance el final de su vida útil, llévelo a un punto limpio. Cuand o llegue el momento de desechar el

producto, la recogida por separado éste y/o su batería ayudará a salvar los recursos naturales y a proteger la salud humana y

medioambiental.

Le symbole ci-dessous signifie que selon les réglementations locales votre produit et/ou sa batterie doivent être éliminés séparément des

ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit atteint sa fin de vie, amenez-le à un centre de recyclage. Au moment de la mise au rebut, la

collecte sép arée de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie aidera à économiser les ressources naturelles et protéger l'environnement et la

santé humaine.

Il simbolo sotto significa che secondo i regolamenti locali il vostro prodotto e/o batteria deve essere smaltito separatamente dai rifiuti

domestici. Quando questo prodotto raggiunge la fine della vita di servizio portarlo a una stazione di riciclaggio. Al momento dello

smaltimento, la raccolta separata del vostro prodotto e/o della sua batteria aiuta a risparmiare risorse naturali e a proteggere l'ambiente

e la salute umana.

Symbolen innebär att enligt lokal lagstiftning ska produkten och/eller dess batteri kastas separat från hushållsavfallet. När den här

produkten når slutet av sin livslängd ska du ta den till en återvinningsstation. Vid tiden för kasseringen bidrar du till en bättre miljö och

mänsklig hälsa genom att göra dig av med den på ett återvinningsställe.

Appendix C Legal Information

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

364

Environmental Product Declaration

Appendix C Legal Information

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

365

台灣

安全警告

為了您的安全，請先閱讀以下警告及指示 :

• 請勿將此產品接近水、火焰或放置在高溫的環境。

• 避免設備接觸任何液體 - 切勿讓設備接觸水、雨水、高濕度、污水腐蝕性的液體或其他水份。

• 灰塵及污物 - 切勿接觸灰塵、污物、沙土、食物或其他不合適的材料。

• 雷雨天氣時，不要安裝，使用或維修此設備。有遭受電擊的風險。

• 切勿重摔或撞擊設備，並勿使用不正確的電源變壓器。

• 若接上不正確的電源變壓器會有爆炸的風險。

• 請勿隨意更換產品內的電池。

• 如果更換不正確之電池型式，會有爆炸的風險，請依製造商說明書處理使用過之電池。

• 請將廢電池丟棄在適當的電器或電子設備回收處。

• 請勿將設備解體。

• 請勿阻礙設備的散熱孔，空氣對流不足將會造成設備損害。

• 請插在正確的電壓供給插座 ( 如 : 北美 / 台灣電壓 110V AC，歐洲是 230V AC)。

• 假若電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線損壞，請從插座拔除，若您還繼續插電使用，會有觸電死亡的風險。

• 請勿試圖修理電源變壓器或電源變壓器的纜線，若有毀損，請直接聯絡您購買的店家，購買一個新的電源變壓器。

• 請勿將此設備安裝於室外，此設備僅適合放置於室內。

• 請勿隨一般垃圾丟棄。

• 請參閱產品背貼上的設備額定功率。

• 請參考產品型錄或是彩盒上的作業溫度。

• 產品沒有斷電裝置或者採用電源線的插頭視為斷電裝置的一部分，以下警語將適用 :

－對永久連接之設備，在設備外部須安裝可觸及之斷電裝置；

－對插接式之設備，插座必須接近安裝之地點而且是易於觸及的。

Viewing Certifications

Go to http://www.zyxel.com to view this product’s documentation and certifications.

ZyXEL Limited Warranty

ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in material or workmanship for a specific

period (the Warranty Period) from the date o f purchase. The Warranty Period varies by region. Check with your vendor and/or the

authorized ZyXEL local distributor for details about the Warranty Period of this product. During the warranty period, and upon proof of

purchase , should the prod uct have indi cations of failu re due to faulty workmanshi p and/or material s, Zy XEL will, at its disc retion, repair or

replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to

restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally

equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has

been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.

Note

Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other

warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. Z yXEL shall in

no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.

To obtain the services of this warranty, contact your vendor. You may also refer to the warranty policy for the region in which you bought

the device at http://www.zyxel.com/web/support_warranty_info.php.

Registration

Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at

www.us.zyxel.com for North American products.

Open Source Licenses

This product contains in part some free software distributed under GPL license terms and/or GPL like licenses. Open source licenses are

provided with the firmware package. You can download the latest firmware at www.zyxel.com. To obtain the source code covered under

those Licenses, please contact support@zyxel.com.tw to get it.

Index

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

366

Index

access rights 127

Flickr 267

shares 294, 295

YouTube 269

activation

download service 219

Flickr/YouTube 263

FTP 216

FTP Uploadr 270

recycle bins 127, 293

web publishing 230

adding channels 219

Amazon Fire TV 30

ANONYMOUS FTP 344

anonymous FTP access 216

Apple TV 30

applications 213, 262

adding channels 219

auto upload

Flickr/YouTube 262

FTP Uploadr 270

COPY/SYNC button 232

configuration 232

example 241

synchronization 242

download service 214, 235

activation 219

adding a task 222, 228

configuration 219

notifications 236

P2P download 222, 235

preferences 223

protection 236, 237

status 221

URL 222

FTP 213, 215, 262

activation 216

anonymous access 216

passive mode transfer 216

media server 214, 216

configuration 217

iTunes server 214, 234

print server 240

configuration 231

name 232

web publishing 215, 230, 240

activation 230

example 238

port number 240

archive 192

authorization

Flickr 263, 264

YouTube 267

auto upload

Flickr/YouTube 262

activation 263

authorization 263, 267

configuration 266, 267

FTP Uploadr 270

activation 270

bandwidth limit 273

configuration 272

server entry 271

grace period 267, 269, 273

backup 191, 192, 254, 256

archive 192

synchronization tutorial 194

tutorial 194

backup files

restoring files by 34, 198

backup job

restoring files by 196

backup settings 310

bandwidth limit 273

Index

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

367

certificate 312

editing 312

tutorial 177

verifying 186

certifications 362

viewing 365

Chromecast 30

CIFS 206

cloud 251

cloud storage 254, 256

collaboration 256

configuration

COPY/SYNC button 232

download service 219

Flickr 266

FTP Uploadr 272

print server 231

recycle bins 296

YouTube 267, 268

contact information 355

control panel 106

COPY/SYNC button 17, 232

configuration 232

example 241

synchronization 242

copying contents 298

CPU

temperature 104

usage 104

creating

groups 288, 289

shares 292, 293

users 282, 283

customer support 355

date 210

desktop 41

disclaimer 361

discovery 20

disk

S.M.A.R.T. attributes 79

displaying user information 285

DLNA 214, 234

DNS 106, 108

documentation

related 2

Domain Name System, see DNS

domain user

troubleshooting 345

troubleshooting share access 345

download period control 225

download service 214, 235

activation 219

adding a task 222, 228

configuration 219

download period control 225

notifications 236

activation 219

P2P download

IP filtering 227

protection 236, 237

re-seeding 220

settings 225

torrent files 222, 235

preferences 223

status 221

URL, download service 222

downloading files 126

Dropbox 274

duplexing 98

Exchangeable image file format, see Exif

Exif 130

explicit TLS/SSL 188

fan speed 104

file

troubleshooting access 345

file browser

configure share 126

Index

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

368

file synchronization 256

File Transfer Protocol over Explicit TLS, see FTPES

File Transfer Protocol over TLS, see FTPS

files

downloading 126

uploading 126

FileZilla 188

FindMe 19

fingerprint 186

firmware, upgrading 122

Flickr 262

access rights 267

activation 263

authorization 263, 264

grace period 267

safety level 267

folder

troubleshooting access 345

folder creation 125

FTP 188, 213, 215, 262

activation 216

anonymous access 216

over TLS 188

passive mode transfer 216

FTP Uploadr 270

activation 270

bandwidth limit 273

configuration 272

grace period 273

server entry 271

FTPES 214

FTPES - FTP over explicit TLS/SSL 188

FTPS 188, 262

global icons 140

GMT 24, 211

Google Chromecast 30

Google Drive 256

Google Maps 131

GPS 131

grace period 267, 269, 273

groups 287

adding 288, 289

editing 289

membership 284, 289

names 289

searching 288

Guide

Quick Start 2

hot spare 102

HTTPS 182, 300, 311

icons 140, 142

global 140

users 283

IP address 106

IP filtering 227

iSCSI 81

iSCSI target 86

iTunes server 214, 218, 234

JBOD 98

Ken Burns 137

lag, time 206

language 137

latitude 131

Logitech® Media Server 218

Index

Cloud Storage User’s Guide

369

logs 306

longitude 131

LUN 82

maintenance 302

backup settings 310

logs 306

power management 302

failure 303

resume 303

schedule 304

UPS 303

reset 310

restoring settings 310

shutdown 313

upgrading firmware 122

master browser 210

media server 214, 216

configuration 217

iTunes server 214, 218, 234

Logitech® Media Server 218

rebuild database 216

share publish 217

status 216

membership 284

groups 284, 289

Memopal 254

mirroring 98

moving contents 298

myZyXELCloud 26

naming

server 209

shares 128

workgroup 210

NAS Starter Utility 19

navigation panel 140

network 106

DNS 106, 108

IP address 106

PPPoE 107, 111, 119

TCP/IP 107

notifications

download service

activation 219

notifications, download service 236

one-way incremental backup 254

online backup 254

online support information 2

Table of Contents

Zyxel NAS520-4T User Manual

Related Manuals